Menu

Hebrews 12:2 — Word Study

Depth

N1904ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ κεκάθικεν.¶

BSAlookingaphoraō toeis theho <the>ho of [our] faithpistis [trust and confidence in God] founderarchēgos [the chief leader] andkai perfecterteleiōtēs [the one who completes] Jesus,Iēsous [the author and founder of our salvation] whohos, hē in view ofanti whatho is lying beforeprokeimai Himautos [a goal to strive for] joychara [a deep and lasting happiness] enduredhupomenō [to remain under] [the] crossstauros [an instrument of capital punishment] [its] shameaischunē [disgrace] having despised,kataphroneō [to think little of] aten right handdexios [the place of honor] andte of theho thronethronos [a seat of power] <the>ho of Godtheos [the Supreme Being, the Creator] has sat down.kathizō

Word
Listen & take awayHebrews 12
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 2 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (kathizō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Hebrews 12:2quick helps
In a sentenceThe verse encourages believers to focus on Jesus, who is both the originator and the perfecter of their faith.
Who is speakingThe author of Hebrews, addressing fellow believers.
Where we areIn a passage urging perseverance in faith, amidst challenges.
The hard wordἀρχηγός
Take awayJesus is the source and completion of our faith.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectἀφοράω verbἀφοράω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 27 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Hebrews 12:2

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — Encouragement to Persevere in Faithgenerated

1Therefore, since we are surrounded by such a great cloud of witnesses, let us throw off every encumbrance and the sin that so easily entangles, and let us run with endurance the race set out for us.
2Let us fix our eyes on Jesus, the author and perfecter of our faith, who for the joy set before Him endured the cross, scorning its shame, and sat down at the right hand of the throne of God.
3Consider Him who endured such hostility from sinners, so that you will not grow weary and lose heart.
4In your struggle against sin, you have not yet resisted to the point of shedding your blood.

Hebrews 12:2 emphasizes the importance of keeping our focus on Jesus, who exemplifies faithfulness and endurance. The surrounding verses (Hebrews 12:1-3) encourage believers to shed burdens and run their spiritual race with perseverance, drawing strength from Jesus' example of enduring suffering for the joy set before Him. This passage is a call to remain steadfast in faith, inspired by Christ's own journey.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Hebrews 12:3Consider Him who endured such hostility from sinners, so that you will not grow weary and lose heart.
2Hebrews 9:28so also Christ was offered once to bear the sins of many; and He will appear a second time, not to bear sin, but to bring salvation to those who eagerly await Him.
3Isaiah 8:17I will wait for the LORD, who is hiding His face from the house of Jacob. I will put my trust in Him.
4Isaiah 31:1Woe to those who go down to Egypt for help, who rely on horses, who trust in their abundance of chariots and in their multitude of horsemen. They do not look to the Holy One of Israel; they do not seek the LORD.
5Isaiah 45:22Turn to Me and be saved, all the ends of the earth; for I am God, and there is no other.

The Key Word ἀρχηγός, archēgosgenerated

The word ἀρχηγός (archēgos) means 'founder' or 'originator,' indicating a leader who initiates something significant. In this context, it refers to Jesus as the one who begins and leads our faith journey.

This noun is in the accusative case, singular, masculine, indicating that Jesus is the direct object of our focus. His role as the archēgos highlights His authority and significance in the Christian faith.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The Berean Standard Bible uses author and perfecter to describe Jesus, which is echoed in the KJV and ASV: all three emphasize His foundational and completing role in faith.

The Young's Literal Translation presents a slightly different phrasing but retains the same core meaning, while the Basic English Bible opts for guide and end, which shifts the focus slightly but maintains the essence of leadership.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main verb of the verse is ἀφορῶντες, looking, which governs the entire clause. It is followed by a noun phrase that identifies the subject (Jesus) and a series of participial phrases that describe His actions and attributes.

The structure includes several clauses: the main clause introduces the action of looking, while subordinate clauses provide details about Jesus as the author and perfecter of faith, as well as the reasons for His endurance.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἀρχηγός does not have a direct equivalent in the Septuagint, but it resonates with terms that denote leadership or origin, emphasizing Jesus' unique role in the New Testament.

The concept of enduring suffering for joy is reflected in various Old Testament themes, though the specific phrasing in Hebrews is distinct.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Hebrews 12:2 encourages us to focus on Jesus, who started our faith and brings it to completion. He endured the cross, disregarding its shame, and now sits in a place of honor next to God.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that Jesus is the author of our faith?

It means that Jesus is the one who initiates and leads us in our faith journey, showing us the way to trust in God.

Why is it important to look to Jesus?

Looking to Jesus helps us stay focused on our faith and encourages us to persevere through challenges, as He is our ultimate example.

What does it mean to endure the cross?

Enduring the cross refers to Jesus' willingness to suffer and sacrifice for the sake of joy and redemption, demonstrating His love and commitment.

What is the significance of sitting at the right hand of God?

Sitting at the right hand signifies a position of authority and honor, indicating Jesus' triumph and His role as intercessor for believers.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. In what ways can I keep my focus on Jesus in my daily life?
  2. How does understanding Jesus as the author and perfecter of my faith change my perspective on challenges?
  3. What does it mean to me personally that Jesus endured the cross for the joy set before Him?
  4. How can I encourage others to look to Jesus in their struggles?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Early Church Fathers comment on this verse to highlight the importance of focusing on Jesus as the source of faith and perseverance.

Ephrem the SyrianCOMMENTARY ON THE EPISTLE TO THE HEBREWS c. 306–373
Let us look not toward human beings for the perfection of our faith. In fact, among them one is good for something, but the other is not.
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 12 →
Cyril of JerusalemCatechetical Lecture 15:1 c. 313–386
We preach not one coming of Christ but a second as well, far more glorious than the first. The first gave us a spectacle of his patience; the second will bring with it the crown of the kingdom of God.
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 12 →
Gregory of NyssaAGAINST EUNOMIUS 5.5 c. 335–395
A fire that lies in wood hidden below the surface is often unobserved by the senses of those who see or even touch it but is manifest when it blazes up.
Early Church Fathers on Hebrews 12 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Hebrews 12:2 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Looking unto Jesus, the author and finisher of our faith,.... Not with bodily eyes, for at present he is not to be looked upon in this manner, but with the eye of the understanding, or with the eye

Read John Gill on Hebrews 12 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Looking unto Jesus the author and finisher of our faith; who for the joy that was set before him endured the cross, despising the shame, and is set down at the right hand of the throne of God.

Read Robert Jamieson on Hebrews 12 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Looking unto Jesus the author and finisher of our faith: as if all the former witnesses were not enough, he adds a more excellent one than them all, even our Lord Jesus Christ, who is not only a pattern to them in their race and running of it, but a help, and for which end they were looking to him: the word aforwntev is only here used in all the New Testament, and signifieth a looking off from whatever would distract us from earnestly looking on the proposed object alone; and though a word of sense, yet here noteth an act of the mind. It is borrowed from racers, the similitude of whom the apostle further improves: they fixedly eye their guides or leaders, to help them on in their course; so…

Read Matthew Poole on Hebrews 12 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

2 Looking unto Jesus the author and finisher of our faith; who for the joy that was set before him endured the cross, despising the shame, and is set down at the right hand of the throne of God. Ver. 2. Looking unto Jesus] Gr. αφορωντες, looking off those things that may either divert or discourage, and looking unto Jesus with loving and longing looks. A Persian lady being at the marriage of Cyrus, and asked how she liked the bridegroom? How? said she; I know not. I saw nobody but mine own husband. Saints have a single eye, an eye of adamant, which will turn only to one point, to Christ alone. The author and finisher] The Alpha and Omega, the beginner and ender. In all other things and…

Read John Trapp on Hebrews 12 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(2) Looking unto Jesus.—As in Hebrews 2:9, the description precedes the mention of the name, “Looking unto the Author and Perfecter of (our) faith, Jesus.” The first word is very similar to that of Heb 11:26; the runner looks away from all other objects and fixes his gaze on One. Jesus is not directly spoken of as the Judge (2 Timothy 4:8); but, as the next words show, He has Himself reached the goal, and His presence marks the point at which the race will close. As the last verse spoke of our “patient endurance,” this speaks of our faith, and of this Jesus is the Author and the Perfecter. The former word has occurred before, in Hebrews 2:10; and here, as there, origination is the principal…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Hebrews 12 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 2. Looking unto Jesus] αφορωντες. Looking off and on, or from and to; looking off or from the world and all secular concerns to Jesus and all the spiritual and heavenly things connected with him. This is still an allusion to the Grecian games: those who ran were to keep their eyes fixed on the mark of the prize; they must keep the goal in view. The exhortation implies, 1. That they should place all their hope and confidence in Christ, as their sole helper in this race of faith. 2. That they should consider him their leader in this contest and imitate his example. The author and finisher of - faith] αρχηγος, translated here author, signifies, in general, captain or leader, or the first…

Read AdamClarke on Hebrews 12 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

2. looking unto Jesus] It is not possible to express in English the thought suggested by the Greek verb aphorτntes, which implies that we must “look away (from other things) unto Jesus.” It implies “the concentration of the wandering gaze into a single direction.”the author] The word is the same (ἀρχηγὸν) as that used in Hebrews 2:10. In Acts 3:15; Acts 5:31 it is rendered “a Prince,” as in Isaiah 30:4 (LXX.). By His faithfulness (Hebrews 3:2) he became our captain and standard-bearer on the path of faith.and finisher] He leads us to “the end of our faith,” which is the salvation of our souls (1 Peter 1:9).of our faith] Rather, “of faith.”endured the cross, despising the shame] Lit.…

Read Cambridge on Hebrews 12 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Looking unto Jesus - As a further inducement to do this, the apostle exhorts us to look to the Saviour.

Read Albert Barnes on Hebrews 12 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

Let us fix our eyes on Jesus, the author and perfecter of our faith, who for the joy set before Him endured the cross, scorning its shame, and sat down at the right hand of the throne of God.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

looking to Jesus, the author and perfecter of faith, who for the joy that was set before him endured the cross, despising its shame, and has sat down at the right hand of the throne of God.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

Let us fix our eyes on Jesus, the author and perfecter of our faith, who for the joy set before Him endured the cross, scorning its shame, and sat down at the right hand of the throne of God.

NETBNew English Translation2006

keeping our eyes fixed on Jesus, the pioneer and perfecter of our faith. For the joy set out for him he endured the cross, disregarding its shame, and has taken his seat at the right hand of the throne of God.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Looking unto Jesus the author and finisher of our faith; who for the joy that was set before him endured the cross, despising the shame, and is set down at the right hand of the throne of God.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

looking unto Jesus the author and perfecter of our faith, who for the joy that was set before him endured the cross, despising shame, and hath sat down at the right hand of the throne of God.

RVARevised Version, American1894

looking unto Jesus the author and perfecter of our faith, who for the joy that was set before him endured the cross, despising shame, and hath sat down at the right hand of the throne of God.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Looking to Jesus the author and finisher of our faith; who for the joy that was set before him endured the cross, despising the shame, and is set down at the right hand of the throne of God.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Looking vnto Iesus the authour and finisher of our faith, who for the ioy that was set before him, endured the crosse, and despised the shame, and is set at the right hand of the throne of God.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

looking stedfastly on Jesus the leader and completer of faith: who, in view of the joy lying before him, endured [the] cross, having despised [the] shame, and is set down at the right hand of the throne of God.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

looking to the author and perfecter of faith — Jesus, who, over-against the joy set before him — did endure a cross, shame having despised, on the right hand also of the throne of God did sit down;

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

looking to the Author and Perfecter of the faith—Jesus, who, for the joy set before Him, endured a cross, having despised shame, and sat down at the right hand of the throne of God;

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

Let us pay attention to Jesus, the founder and perfecter of the faith. For the joy that was placed before him, he endured the cross, despised its shame, and sat down at the right hand of the throne of God.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Looking on Jesus, the author and finisher of faith, who having joy set before him, endured the cross, despising the shame, and now sitteth on the right hand of the throne of God.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

We should keep on looking to Jesus, the one who begins and completes our trust in God. Because of the joy ahead of him Jesus endured the cross, disregarding its shame, and sat down at the right hand of God's throne.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Having our eyes fixed on Jesus, the guide and end of our faith, who went through the pains of the cross, not caring for the shame, because of the joy which was before him, and who has now taken his place at the right hand of God's seat of power.

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἀρχηγὸνarchēgos founder G747 2 different renderings
authorASV BSB DRA KJV LSV MSB NWB RVA WEB YLT
founderULB
ὑπέμεινενhupomenō endured G5278 2 different renderings
enduredASV BSB DBY DRA FBV GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB
endureYLT
καταφρονήσας,kataphroneō having despised, G2706 2 different renderings
despisingASV DRA KJV NWB RVA WEB
having despisedDBY LSV YLT
θεοῦtheos of God G2316 2 different renderings
of godASV BSB DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
godFBV
κεκάθικεν.¶kathizō has sat down. G2523 3 different renderings
sat downASV BSB FBV LSV MSB RVA ULB WEB
setDBY DRA GNV KJV NETB NWB
sit downYLT

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseΤοιγαροῦνThereforeclausenoun phrase · subjectκαὶalsoἡμεῖςweclause · adverbialverbἔχοντεςhavingnoun phrase · objectτοσοῦτονsuch a greatnoun phraseadjective phraseclauseverbπερικείμενονencompassingadverbialἡμῖνusnoun phraseνέφοςa cloudμαρτύρωνof witnessesclause · adverbialverbἀποθέμενοιhaving laid asidenoun phrase · objectnoun phraseὄγκονweightπάνταeveryκαὶandnoun phraseτὴνthenoun phraseεὐπερίστατονeasily entanglingἁμαρτίανsinprepositional phrase · adverbialδι’withὑπομονῆςenduranceverbτρέχωμενshould runnoun phrase · objectτὸνthenoun phraseadjective phraseclauseverbπροκείμενονlying beforeadverbialἡμῖνusἀγῶναraceclause · adverbialverbἀφορῶντεςlookingprepositional phrase · adverbialεἰςtonoun phrasenoun phrasenoun phraseτὸνthenoun phrasenoun phraseτῆςof [our]πίστεωςfaithnoun phraseἀρχηγὸνfounderκαὶandτελειωτὴνperfecterἸησοῦνJesusclauseclausesubjectὃςwhoprepositional phrase · adverbialἀντὶin view ofnoun phraseτῆςthenoun phraseadjective phraseclauseverbπροκειμένηςlying beforeadverbialαὐτῷHimχαρᾶςjoyverbὑπέμεινενenduredobjectσταυρὸν[the] crossclause · adverbialobjectαἰσχύνης[its] shameverbκαταφρονήσαςhaving despisedτεandclauseprepositional phrase · adverbialἐνatnoun phraseδεξιᾷright handnoun phraseτοῦof thenoun phraseθρόνουthronenoun phraseτοῦ-Θεοῦof Godverbκεκάθικενsat down

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

aspicientes in auctorem fidei, et consummatorem Jesum, qui proposito sibi gaudio sustinuit crucem, confusione contempta, atque in dextera sedis Dei sedet.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܢܚܘܪ ܒܝܫܘܥ ܕܗܘ ܗܘܐ ܪܝܫܐ ܘܓܡܘܪܐ ܠܗܝܡܢܘܬܢ ܕܚܠܦ ܚܕܘܬܐ ܕܐܝܬ ܗܘܐ ܠܗ ܣܝܒܪ ܨܠܝܒܐ ܘܥܠ ܒܗܬܬܐ ܐܡܣܪ ܘܥܠ ܝܡܝܢܐ ܕܟܘܪܣܝܗ ܕܐܠܗܐ ܝܬܒ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ κεκάθικεν.¶

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ κεκάθικεν.¶

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ κεκάθικεν.¶

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ κεκάθικεν.¶

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ κεκάθικεν.¶

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ κεκάθικεν.¶

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ κεκάθικεν.¶

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

ἀφορῶντες εἰς τὸν τῆς πίστεως ἀρχηγὸν καὶ τελειωτὴν Ἰησοῦν, ὃς ἀντὶ τῆς προκειμένης αὐτῷ χαρᾶς ὑπέμεινεν σταυρὸν αἰσχύνης καταφρονήσας, ἐν δεξιᾷ τε τοῦ θρόνου τοῦ θεοῦ

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
κεκάθικεν.¶ has sat down.NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, ByzTR

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Hebrews 12:2ἀφοράωlookinglookingἀφοράωεἰςtotoεἰςthethe<the><the>πίστιςof [our] faof [our] faithπίστιςἀρχηγόςfounderfounderἀρχηγόςκαίandandκαίτελειωτήςperfecterperfecterτελειωτήςἸησοῦςJesus,Jesus,Ἰησοῦςὅςwhowhoὅςἀντίin view ofin view ofἀντίwhatwhatπρόκειμαιis lying beis lying beforeπρόκειμαιαὐτόςHimHimαὐτόςχαράjoyjoyχαράὑπομένωenduredenduredὑπομένωσταυρός[the] cross[the] crossσταυρόςαἰσχύνη[its] shame[its] shameαἰσχύνηκαταφρονέωhaving desphaving despisedκαταφρονέωἐνatatἐνδεξιόςright handright handδεξιόςτέandandτέof theof theθρόνοςthronethroneθρόνος<the><the>θεόςof Godof Godθεόςκαθίζωhas sat dowhas sat down.καθίζωχαίρωv. I rejoiv. I rejoice, aχαίρωἀπόPrep. fromPrep. from, awaἀπόπείθωv. I persuv. I persuade, πείθωἀρχήn.f. rulern.f. ruler, begἀρχήτελειόωv. I complv. I complete, τελειόωArticle thArticle theπρόPrep. befoPrep. beforeπρόὑπόPrep. by, Prep. by, underὑπόαἰσχύνωv. I am asv. I am ashamedαἰσχύνωκατάPrep. downPrep. down fromκατάδέχομαιv. I take,v. I take, receδέχομαιοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗἀήρn.m. airn.m. airἀήρἑαυτοῦRefl.pr. hRefl.pr. himselἑαυτοῦἵστημιv. I causev. I cause to sἵστημιεἰςPrep. intoPrep. into, in,εἰςἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκκαίCj. and, eCj. and, even, καί
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Hebrews 12:2

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
ἀφορῶντεςaphoraō looking G872 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To consider means to look at something carefully and thoughtfully, like fixing your gaze on something. In Hebrews 12:2, it means to focus on Jesus and his example. This word is about giving your attention to something or someone.
Tyndale gloss
to consider
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀφοράω (i.e., aphoraō) combines elements meaning 'to look away' and 'to consider attentively.' It covers a range of meanings from fixing one's gaze on something to viewing it distinctly. In the New Testament, it appears in Hebrews 12:2 and Philippians 2:23, where it conveys the idea of focusing one's attention or mind on a specific subject.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀφ-οράω, -ῶ,

[in LXX: IV Mac 17:10 (είς θεόν)*;]

to look away from all else at, fix one's gaze upon: metaph. (MM, s.v.), He 12:2;

simply, to see: ἀφίδω (v.s. ἀπεῖδον, and Lft., Phl., in l.; MM, s.v.), Phl 2:23 (v. Ellic., in l.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀφ-οράω, -@; to turn the eyes away from other things and fix them on something; cf. ἀποβλέπω. trop. to turn one’s mind to: eis τινα, Heb. xii. 2 [W. § 66, 2 d.], (εἰς θεόν, 4 Mace. xvii. 10; for exx. fr. Grk. writ. ef. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2 p. 862). Further, ef. ἀπεῖδον." ad-opitw; impf. ἀφώριζον ; Attic fut. ἀφοριῶ Mt. xxv. 32 (T WH adopiow); xiii. 49, [W. § 13,1 ο.; B.37 (32)]; 1 aor. ἀφώρισα; Pass., pf. ptep. ἀφωρισμένος ; 1 aor. impv. ἀφορίσθητε ; (ὁρίζω to make a ὅρος or boundary) ; to mark off from (amo) others by boundaries, to limit, to separate: ἑαυτόν, from others, Gal. ii. 12; τοὺς μαθητάς, from thosé unwilling to obey the gospel, Acts xix. 9; ἐκ μέσου τινῶν, Mt. xiii. 49; ἀπό twos, xxv. 32. Pass. in a reflex. sense: 2 Co. vi. 17. absol.: in a bad sense, to exclude as disreputable, Lk. vi. 22; in a good sense, τινὰ εἴς τι, (0 appoint, set apart, one for some purpose (to do…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀφοράω (aphoraō) — to consider.

ἀφορ-άω,

Ionic dialect ἀπορ-έω, future ἀπόψομαι: aorist ἀπεῖδον:— look away from all others at one, have in view, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; look at, τι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; of a distant object, [Refs 5th c.BC+]compare, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. ὅθεν.. look to the point whence.., [Refs]; εἴς τι or τινα, [NT+1st c.AD+]: hence, obey,[Refs 4th c.BC+]:—in middle, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__b of Places, look towards, εἰς βόρειον ὠκεανόν[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

2. to view from a place, ἀπὸ δενδρέου[Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. rarely, look away, have the back turned, probably in [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀφοράω

aphorao

from 575 and 3708; to consider attentively:--look.

see GREEK for 575

see GREEK for 3708

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀφοράω

v.

I look away from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀφοράω aphoraō 2x

to view with undivided attention by looking away from every other object; to regard fixedly and earnestly, Heb. 12:2; to see distinctly, Phil. 2:23*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀφοράω to look away from all others at one, to have in full view, to look at, τι or πρός τι Thuc.; also in Mid., Ar.

to view from a place, ἀπὸ δενδρέου Hdt.

to look away, have the back turned, Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NPM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%i may have seen
i may have seen50% · 1×looking50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἄνDisj
ὡςas, like as, how
ἀφοράωlooking
what comes after →
Article the
περί
εἰς
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀφοράω · 2× in the New Testament
Hebrews Philippians
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 114c. AD 40

εἰς ἣν ἀφορῶντες κυβερνῆται τὰς ἐν θαλάττῃ μυρίας ὁδοὺς ἀνέτεμον ἀπίστῳ πράγματι καὶ μείζονι ἢ κατὰ φύσιν ἀνθρωπίνην ἐπιθέμενοι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.85c. AD 75–95

πρὸς γοῦν αὐτοῦ καὶ τῶν ἔργων, ἃ διʼ ἐκεῖνον ἡμῖν ἤδη πέπρακται, μὴ καταφρονήσητε τῶν λεγομένων εἰς ἐμὲ τὸν λέγοντα ἀφορῶντες μηδʼ ὅτι γλῶττα ἀνθρωπίνη πρὸς ὑμᾶς λέγει·

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
εἰςeis to G1519 Preposition
1,766× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means toward or into, indicating direction or purpose, as seen in Matthew 8:23 and Mark 1:45. It can also imply a sense of movement or action. The KJV translates it in various ways.
Tyndale gloss
toward
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰς,

prep. c. acc.,

expressing entrance, direction, limit, into, unto, to, upon, towards, for, among (Lat. in, c. acc.).

Of place.

After verbs of motion;

of entrance into: Mt 8:23 9:7, Mk 1:45, Lk 2:15 8:31, al.;

of approach, to or towards: Mk 11:1, Lk 6:8 19:28, Jo 11:31 21:6, al.;

before pl. and collective nouns, among: Mk 4:7 8:19, 20, Lk 11:49, Jo 21:23, al.;

Of a limit reached, unto, on, upon: Mt 8:18, 21:1, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰς (eis) — toward.

ἐν εἰς

or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰς

eis

a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or

entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);

also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,

(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more

exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,

+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the

intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at

one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the

end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often

used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs

(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰς

Prep.

into, in, among, till, for

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰς

into, to c. acc.

PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:

OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.

with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%into
into33% · 595×to32% · 570×for10% · 185×in9% · 160×unto4% · 69×toward2% · 44×other renderings8% · 145×other renderings2% · 29×

1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial95%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
βάλλωI cast, throw, rεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inδέbut, on the othe
εἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in, en
καίand, even, also,μήNegαὐτός
ἔρχομαιI come, go
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςοὗτος
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἐκκόπτωI cut out, cut oπόλιςa city
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existκαίand, even, also,δίδωμιI offer, give
εἰςto1766×
what comes after →
Article the
αἰώνan age, a cycle οἶκοςa house, househoοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὗτος
ἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem
καίand, even, also,εἰςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅς
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἄνDisj
σύ
καίand, even, also,μήNegἐν

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰς · 1,766× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Mark Romans Revelation 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Peter 1 Corinthians Ephesians

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
τῆςho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
πίστεωςpistis of [our] faith G4102 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
243× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Faith is the meaning of this word, which involves trust and confidence in God or Jesus Christ. It's used in Matthew 8:10 and Romans 1:8, showing reliance on God's power and promises.
Amplified meaning
trust and confidence in God
Tyndale gloss
faith
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πίστις (pistis) is a feminine noun meaning faith, belief, or trust, derived from the verb πείθω (to persuade). It encompasses a range of meanings, primarily focusing on religious faith in God or Christ, and includes concepts of fidelity and assurance. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, often linked to salvation and the Christian faith, as seen in verses like Matthew 8:10 and Romans 1:8.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πίστις, -εως, ἡ

(< πείθω),

[in LXX chiefly for אֱמוּנָה;]

in active sense, faith, belief, trust, confidence, in NT always of religious faith in God or Christ or spiritual things: Mt 8:10, Lk 5:20, Ac 14:9, Ro 1:8, I Co 2:5, II Co 1:24, I Ti 1:5, al.; c. gen. obj., Mk 11:22, Ac 3:16, Ro 3:22,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πίστις, -ews, 9, (πείθω [q-v-]), fr. [Hes., Theogn., Pind. ], Aeschyl., Hdt. down; Sept. for 93308, several times for Ax and IDR; faith; i.e. 1. conviction of the truth of anything, belief, (Plat., Polyb., Joseph., Plut.; θαυμάσια καὶ μείζω πίστεως, Diod. 1, 86); in the N. T. of a conviction or belief respecting man’s relationship to God and divine things, generally with the included idea of trust and holy fervor born of faith and conjoined with τὸς: Heb. xi. 1 (where πίστις is called ἐλπιζομένων trdcraces, πραγμάτων ἔλεγχος οὐ βλεπομένων) ; Opp. to εἶδος, 2 Co. vy. 7; joined with ἀγάπη and ἐλπίς, 1 Co. xiii. 13. a. when it relates to God, πίστις is the conviction that God exists and is the creator and ruler of all things, the provider and bestower of eternal salvation through Christ: Heb. xi. 6; xii. 2; xiii. 7; πίστις ἐπὶ θεόν, Heb. vi. 1; ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, by which ye…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πίστις. In accordance with its common NT usage, πίστις is used of ‘faith,’’ ‘‘ confidence” in a person in such passages as P Strass I. 4138 (c. A.D. 250), when in a legal process a witness is charged—as πρεσβύτης Kal πίστεως ἄξιος εἰπὲ ἃ οἶδας ἐν τῷ πρά[γματ]ι, and P Oxy XIV. τό27} (a.D. 342) διὰ τὴν περὶ ἡμᾶς μετριότητα καὶ πίστις (/. πίστιν), ‘owing to your clemency to us and confidence in us’’ (Edd.). In P Lond 233! (a.D. 345) (ΞΞ 11. p. 273, Chrest. I. p. 68) the editor translates τῇ σῇ πίστ(ε)ν as apparently = ‘‘at your discretion” or ‘“‘on your own credit.” P Tebt II. 418% (iii/A.D.) shows 5. ἀπολάβῃς παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ καλῇ πίστει, “‘receive it back from me in good faith’’ (Edd.): cf. P Oxy 1. 711: 11. (a.p. 303) νομίζουσα τούτους τὴν καλήν μοι πίστειν ἀποσώζειν, ‘thinking that they would preserve my good name” (Edd.). With the conjunction of πίστις and ἀλήθεια in τ Tim 27 cf. P Oxy I.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πίστις (pistis) — faith.

πίστις, ἡ,

genitive εως, Ionic dialect ιος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; dative πίστει, Ionic dialect πίστῑ [Refs 5th c.BC+]: (πείθομαι):—trust in others, faith, first in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: generally, persuasion of a thing, confidence, assurance, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ βεβαιοτάτη π., ἀταραξία καὶ π. βέβαιος, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; σωφροσύνης π. ἔχειν περί τινος to be persuaded of his probity, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. in subjective sense, good faith, trustworthiness, honesty, [Refs 6th c.BC+]

2. b of things, credence, credit, τὰν π. σμικρὰν παρ᾽ ἔμοιγ᾽ ἔχει [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. c καλῇ π., = Latin bona fide, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; αἱ κατὰ πίστιν γεινόμεναι κληρονομίαι, = Latin hereditates fideicommissariae, [Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πίστις

pistis

from 3982; persuasion, i.e. credence; moral conviction (of religious

truth, or the truthfulness of God or a religious teacher), especially

reliance upon Christ for salvation; abstractly, constancy in such

profession; by extension, the system of religious (Gospel) truth

itself:--assurance, belief, believe, faith, fidelity.

see GREEK for 3982

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πίστις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

faith, belief, trust

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πίστις pistis 243x

faith, belief, firm persuasion, 2 Cor. 5:7; Heb. 11:1; assurance, firm conviction, Rom. 14:23; ground of belief, guarantee, assurance, Acts 17:31; good faith, honesty, integrity, Mt. 23:23; Gal. 5:22; Tit. 2:10; faithfulness, truthfulness, Rom. 3:3; in NT faith in God and Christ, Mt. 8:10; Acts 3:16, et al. freq.; ἡ πίστις, the…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πίστις πίστις, ιος, ἡ, πείθομαι trust in others, faith, Lat. fides, fiducia, Hes., Theogn., attic; c. gen. pers. faith or belief in one, Eur.:— generally, persuasion of a thing, confidence, assurance, Pind., attic

good faith, trustworthiness, faithfulness, honesty, Lat. fides, Theogn., Hdt., attic

in a commercial sense, credit, trust, πίστις τοσούτων χρημάτων ἐστί μοι παρά τινι I have credit for so much money with him, Dem.; εἰς πίστιν διδόναι τί τινι id. Dem.

in Theol. faith, belief, as opp. to sight and knowledge, NTest.

that which gives confidence: hence,

an assurance, pledge of good faith, warrant, guarantee, Soph., Eur.; πίστιν καὶ ὅρκια ποιεῖσθαι to make a treaty by exchange of assurances and oaths, Hdt.; οὔτε π. οὔθ᾽ ὅρκος μένει Ar.; πίστιν διδόναι to give assurances, Hdt.; διδόναι καὶ λαμβάνειν to…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

fath:

1. Etymology

2. Meaning: a Divergency

3. Faith in the Sense of Creed

4. A Leading Passage Explained

5. Remarks

6. Conclusion

In the Old Testament (the King James Version) the word occurs only twice: De 32:20 ('emun); Hab 2:4 ('emunah). In the latter the Revised Version (British and American) places in the margin the alternative rendering, "faithfulness." In the New Testament it is of very frequent occurrence, always representing pistis, with one exception in the King James Version (not the Revised Version (British and American)), Heb 10:23, where it represents elpis, "hope."

1. Etymology:

The history of the English word is rather interesting than important; use and contexts, alike for it and its Hebrew and Greek parallels, are…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Faith

Faith is in general the persuasion of the mind that a certain statement is true (Phil. 1:27; 2 Thess. 2:13). Its primary idea is trust. A thing is true, and therefore worthy of trust. It admits of many degrees up to full assurance of faith, in accordance with the evidence on which it rests.

Faith is the result of teaching (Rom. 10:14-17). Knowledge is an essential element in all faith, and is sometimes spoken of as an equivalent to faith (John 10:38; 1 John 2:3). Yet the two are distinguished in this respect, that faith includes in it assent, which is an act of the will in addition to the act of the understanding.…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The assent of the understanding to any truth. Religious faith is assent to the truth of divine revelation and of the events and doctrines contained in it. This may be merely historical, without producing any effect on our lives and conversation; and it is then a dead faith, such as even the devils have. But a living or saving faith not only believes the great doctrines of religion as true, but embraces them with the heart and affections; and is thus the source of sincere obedience to the divine will, exhibited in the life and conversation. Faith in Christ is a grace wrought in the heart by the Holy Spirit, whereby we receive Christ as our Savior, our Prophet, Priest, and King, and love and obey him as such. This living faith in Christ is the means of salvation-not meritoriously, but instrumentally. Without it there can be no forgiveness of sins, and no holiness of life; and they who are…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning 2Sa 22:31; Ps 2:12; 5:11; 7:1; 9:9,10; 18:30; 32:10; 33:18,19; 34:1-8,22; 36:7; 40:4; 64:10; 78:5-7; 84:5,12; 112:5,7,8; 118:8,9; 125:1; 147:11; Pr 3:5; 14:26; 22:19; 28:25; 29:25; 30:5; Isa 10:20; 14:32; 26:3; 30:15; 57:13; Jer 17:7,8; 39:18; Na 1:7; Mt 9:22; 21:21,22; Mr 9:23,24; 11:23,24; Lu 7:50; 8:48-50; 17:5; 18:8; Joh…

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 24 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 57c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ μέγεθος τῆς περὶ τὸν ἥλιον δυνάμεως καὶ ἀρχῆς ἐμφανεστάτην πίστιν ἔχει τὴν λεχθεῖσαν ἤδη·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.14c. AD 75–95

τὸ σύνολον δὲ μάλιστά τις ἂν ἐκ ταύτης μάθοι τῆς ἱστορίας ἐθελήσας αὐτὴν διελθεῖν, ὅτι τοῖς μὲν θεοῦ γνώμῃ κατακολουθοῦσι καὶ τὰ καλῶς νομοθετηθέντα μὴ τολμῶσι παραβαίνειν πάντα κατορθοῦται πέρα πίστεως καὶ γέρας εὐδαιμονία πρόκειται παρὰ θεοῦ·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Fay. 122Euhemeria (Arsinoites)AD 100

Σισόιν τὸν τέκτονα ἀποτεῖσαι καὶ πέμψεις εἰς Χαλῶθιν ἐάν τινα εὕρῃς κατὰ παρόντας ἔχοντα πίστιν πολλήν, πέμψεις δὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν ρο … … πρὸ ἡμερῶν τριῶν … ες.

P.Mich. 3 188Bakchias (Arsinoites)AD 120

ὁμολογῶν Ἑρμᾶς ἀποδοῦναι τὸ προκίμενον ἀργύριον ἀποδότω σὺν καὶ τῶι προκιμένωι ἀργυρίῳ … τῆς πίστεως περὶ αὐτὴν τὴν Ταπεκῦσιν οὔσης. ὑπογραφεὺς τῆς Ταπεκύσιος καὶ τοῦ αὐτῆς κυρίου Ἀμμώνιος Διοσκύρου

P.Fam.Tebt. 27Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 132

δούλην Ἀθηνάριον ταύτην τοιαύτην ἀναπόρριφον πλὴν ἐπαφῆς καὶ ἱερᾶς νόσου τῆι ἰδίᾳ αὐτοῦ Οὐαλερίου πίστει ἧς ἐὰν εὕρῃ τιμῆς τοῖς προσελευσομένοις ἀγορασταῖς, τῆς βεβαιώσεως πάσῃ βεβαιώσει ἐξακολουθούσης τῇ Ἡρακλείᾳ,

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
ἀρχηγὸνarchēgos founder G747 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
4× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for founder refers to a chief leader or the originator of something, used in Acts 3:15 to describe Jesus as the author of life. It can also refer to a prince or leader, emphasizing their role as a beginner or starter.
Amplified meaning
the chief leader
Tyndale gloss
founder
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀρχηγός (transliterated as archēgos) means 'originator' or 'founder' and can also refer to a 'leader' or 'prince.' It is built from roots meaning 'beginning' and 'to lead.' In the New Testament, it appears in Acts 3:15 and Hebrews 2:10, where it conveys the sense of a primary author or chief leader. Moulton & Milligan note a complexity in distinguishing between 'founder' and 'leader' in specific contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀρχηγός, -όν,

[in LXX for רֹאשׁ, נָשִׂיא etc.;]

beginning, originating: more freq., as subst.;

founder, author (Lat. auchor; so sometimes in π., v. MM, s.v.; Milligan, NTD, 75): Ac 3:15 (R, mg.), He 2:10 (R, txt.; but v. Westc., in l., and Page, Ac 3:15).

prince, leader (so in MGr., v. Kennedy, Sources, 153): Ac 3:15 (R, txt.) 5:31, He 2:10 (cf. R, mg.) 12:2 (Cremer, 117).†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀρχηγός. To determine between ‘‘ founder” and “‘leader” in Heb 2?°, 127, Ac 315, 5%!, is a complex question which would carry us beyond the limits of a lexical note. But our few citations go to emphasize the closeness of correspondence with actor, which it evidently translates in a Proconsul’s edict, Sy// 3163 (ii/B.C.) ἐγεγόνει ἀρχηγὸς τῆς ὅλης ocvyxtcews,!? τὸν yeyoνότα ἀρχηγὸν ἰτ]ῶν πραχθέντων. So P Oxy I. 4158 (iii/iv A.D.), where a crowd shouts repeatedly in honour of the prytanis, ἀρχηγὲ τῶν ἀγαθῶν, ‘source of our blessings,” auctor bonorum. The phrase is found five centuries earlier in the Rosetta stone, OGZS go? . . . anniversaries which are πολλῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀρχηγοὶ (πᾶσι. In OG/S 212! Apollo is ἀ. τοῦ [γένους] of Seleucus Nicator (B.c. 306-280) whose mother was said to have dreamed that she conceived by Apollo: so in 219° of his son Antiochus I. (Soter). P Oxy X. 124 rit 35…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀρχηγός (archēgos) — founder.

ἀρχηγός,

Doric dialect ἀρχᾱγός, όν, beginning, originating, λόγος ἀρχηγὸς κακῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; primary, leading, chief, Τροίας ἀ. τιμάς[Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. as substantive, founder, of a tutelary hero, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; as feminine, ancestral heroine, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; founder of a family, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. prince, chief, Δία ἀ. θεῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; chief captain, leader, Ἑλλάνων[Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.3. first cause, originator, κοπίδων[Refs 5th c.BC+]; φόνου[NT+4th c.BC+]the originating power, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; primary, fundamental, ἀρχηγὸν ἡ φωνή[Refs 1st c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀρχηγός

archegos

from 746 and 71; a chief leader:--author, captain, prince.

see GREEK for 746

see GREEK for 71

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀρχηγός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

originator, author, founder

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀρχηγός archēgos 4x

a chief, leader, prince, Acts 5:31; a prime author, Acts 3:15; Heb. 2:10; 12:2*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀρχηγός ἡγέομαι beginning, originating a thing, c. gen., Eur.

as Subst., like ἀρχηγέτης, founder, of a tutelary hero, Soph.

a prince, chief, Aesch., Simon., Thuc.

a first cause, originator, τοῦ πράγματος Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

foun'-der (from tsaraph): A worker in molten metal (Jud 17:4, etc.).

The word in the King James Version in Jer 10:9,14; 51:17 is rendered in the Revised Version (British and American) "goldsmith," and in 6:29 by a paraphrase, "They go on refining."

See REFINER; GOLDSMITH.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%author
author25% · 1×prince25% · 1×archetype25% · 1×founder25% · 1×

4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object50%second object25%adverbial25%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
Article the
ἄγωI lead
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
Article the
ἀρχηγόςfounder
what comes after →
Article the
ζωήlifeσωτηρίαdeliverance, sal
καίand, even, also, nam
σωτήρa savior, deliveτελειωτήςa perfecter, com

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀρχηγός · 4× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews
Across the New Testament2 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 18 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Clement of Rome Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.175c. AD 40

"δῶμεν ἀρχηγὸν καὶ ἀποστρέψωμεν εἰς“ τὸ πάθος "Αἴγυπτον" (Num.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 7.207c. AD 75–95

περιστάντων δὲ τῶν φίλων καὶ σκεπόντων ἔτι μᾶλλον ὁ Σαμούις βλασφημῶν διετέλει, μιαιφόνον καὶ πολλῶν ἀρχηγὸν κακῶν ἀποκαλῶν.

Clement of RomeSecond Clement 20.5c. AD 96

Τῷ μόνῳ θεῷ ἀοράτῳ, πατρὶ τῆς ἀληθείας, τῷ ἐξαποστείλαντι ἡμῖν τὸν σωτῆρα καὶ ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ἀφθαρσίας, δἰ οὗ καὶ ἐφανέρωσεν ἡμῖν τὴν ἀλήθειαν καὶ τὴν ἐπουράνιον ζωήν, αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD
P.Lond. 5 1680Aphrodites Kome (Antaiopolites)AD 501–AD 600

αἰτήσεως τῆς τάξεως ὅπερ δεχόμενος διάβηθι … παρὰ τὸ δικαστήριον αὐτόν τε τὸν ὡς ἀρχηγὸν … α καὶ μέντοι τοὺς τὰ πρῶτα φέροντας … κώμης πεισόμενος μετεξετάζειν σα

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
τελειωτὴνteleiōtēs perfecter G5051 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A finisher is someone who completes or perfects something, as described in Hebrews 12:2, where Jesus is the finisher of our faith. This word emphasizes the idea of bringing something to its intended conclusion. It highlights Jesus' role in perfecting our faith and helping us reach spiritual maturity.
Amplified meaning
the one who completes
Tyndale gloss
finisher
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τελειωτής (i.e., *teleiōtēs*) means a finisher or perfecter, derived from the verb τελειόω (to complete). It appears only once in the New Testament, specifically in Hebrews 12:2, where it refers to one who brings faith to its perfection.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τελειωτής, -οῦ, ὁ

(< τελειόω),

a consummator, finisher: He 12:2 (nowhere else).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τελειωτής, -00, ὁ, (τελειόω), (Vulg. consummator), a perfecter: τῆς πίστεως, one who has in his own person raised faith to its perfection and so set before us the highest example of faith, Heb. xii. 2. The word occurs nowhere else.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τελειωτής (teleiōtēs) — finisher.

τελει-ωτής, οῦ, ὁ,

accomplisher, finisher, τῆς πίστεως [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

τελειωτής

teleiotes

from 5048; a completer, i.e. consummater:--finisher.

see GREEK for 5048

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τελειωτής, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a perfecter, completer

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τελειωτής teleiōtēs 1x

a finisher, one who completes and perfects a thing; one who brings through to final attainment, perfecter, Heb. 12:2*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τελειωτής τελειωτής, οῦ, ὁ, an accomplisher, finisher, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%perfecter
perfecter100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceτελειωτής · 1× in the New Testament
Hebrews
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
Ἰησοῦν,Iēsous Jesus, G2424 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Hebrews than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Jesus is the Greek name for Joshua, which means God is salvation. It is used to refer to Jesus Christ, the son of God, as well as other Israelites with the same name. The name Jesus appears over 900 times in the New Testament.
Amplified meaning
the author and founder of our salvation
Tyndale gloss
Joshua
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word Ἰησοῦς (*Iēsous*) refers primarily to Jesus, the Savior, and is derived from the Hebrew name Joshua or Jehoshua. It appears frequently in the New Testament, denoting Jesus Christ, and also refers to other figures named Jesus, such as Jesus, son of Eliezer, and Jesus Justus. The entries consistently identify it as a common name among Israelites.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

Ἰησοῦς, -οῦ, dat., voc. -οῦ, acc., -οῦν (Heb. יְהוֹשׁוּעַ, יְהֹשֻׁעַ, יֵשׁוּעַ),

JESUS: Mt 1:21, al.; ὁ Ἰ, Mt 3:13, al.; Ἰ. Χριστός, Mt 1:1, Mk 1:1, al.; Χρ. Ἰ., Ro 2:26, al.; κύριος Ἰ., Ac 28:31, al.; Ἰησοῦ, voc., Mk 1:24, al.

Joshua: Ac 7:45, He 4:8.

Jesus, son of Eliezer: Lk 3:29.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

Ἰησοῦς, -οὔ, dat. -οὔ, ace. -vdv, voc. -od, [W. § 10, 1], 6, Jesus (ΠῚ and ace. to a later form jw, Syr. > ” Saas, i. e. whose help is Jehovah; Germ. Gotthilf; but later writ. gave the name the force of My31w, see Mt. i. 21, cf. Sir. xlvi. 1 Ἰησοῦς ὃς ἐγένετο κατὰ τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ μέγας ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ ἐκλεκτῶν αὐτοῦ, of Joshua, the successor of Moses; Philo, nom. mutat. § 21 Ἰησοῦς ἑρμηνεύεται σωτηρία κυρίου), a very Com. prop. name among the Israelites; cf. Delitzsch, Der Jesusname, in the Zeitschr. f. d. luth. Theol. for 1876, p. 209 sq. [or Talmud. Stud. xv.]. Inthe N. T. 1. Joshua [fully Jehoshua], the famous captain of the Israelites, Moses’ successor: Acts vii. 45; Heb. iv. 8. 2. Jesus, son of Eliezer, one of Christ’s ancestors: Lk. iii. 29 L T Tr WH. 3. Jesus, the Son of God, the Saviour of mankind: Mt. i. 21, 25; ΓΚ. i. 31; ii. 21, and very often; see κύριος and Χριστός. 4. Jesus…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

Ἰησοῦς nor in language of disrespect to the established religion of our city”: see further CRE® p. 260, and Lightfoot Assays on Supernatural Religion, p. 299f., who cites an inscr. found in this very temple of Ephesus, though of a later date than the passage in Acts,—éorw ἱεροσυλία kal ἀσέβεια, ““let it be regarded as sacrilege and impiety” (Wood Zzscr. vi. I, p. 14). Other exx. of the adj. from the inscrr. are Syll 523% (iii/B.c.) ὁ δὲ εἴπας ἢ [πρήξ]ας τι παρὰ τόνδε τὸν νόμον .. . ἔστω ἱερόσυλος, 2). 6028 (iv/iii B.c.) ἢν δέ τις [τὴν στήλην] ἀφαν[(ζηι ἢ τὰ γράμματα], πασχέτω ὡς ἱερόσυλος, and 24. 680!° (Rom.). The new Menander shows several exx. of ἱερόσυλε used in abuse with a general sense (cf. ‘‘ horse-thief’’): e.g. Menandrea, p. 60 388 tep[d]ovde παῖ, Ρ. 3852: ἱερόσυλε…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Joshua.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Jesus.

Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour , [Refs 1st c.AD] (from Middle LSJ)

Ἰησοῦς (Iēsous) — Joshua.

Ἰωσή, see: Ἰωσῆς - -ῆ (Rec. -ή Luk.3:29; AV, Jose; see: Ἰησοῦς, 3), and -ῆτος (Mk, ll with), ὁ,

Joses;

1. brother of our Lord: Mrk.6:3, Mat.13:55 (Rec., see…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

Ἰησοῦς

Iesous

of Hebrew origin (3091); Jesus (i.e. Jehoshua), the name of our Lord

and two (three) other Israelites:--Jesus.

see HEBREW for 03091

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

Ἰησοῦς, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

Jesus

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

Ἰησοῦς Iēsous 917x

a Savior, Jesus, Mt. 1:21, 25; 2:1, et al. freq.; Joshua, Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8; Jesus, a Jewish Christian, Col. 4:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

Ἰησοῦς Jesus, Greek form of Hebrew Joshua or Jehoshua, Saviour, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

je'-zus (Iesous, for yehoshua`):

(1) Joshua, son of Nun (the King James Version Ac 7:45; Heb 4:8; compare 1 Macc 2:55; 2 Esdras 7:37).

(2) (3) High priest and Levite.

See JESHUA, 2, 5.

(4) Son of Sirach.

See SIRACH.

(5) An ancestor of Jesus (Lu 3:29, the King James Version "Jose").

(6) (7) See the next three articles.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Jesus

(1.) Joshua, the son of Nun (Acts 7:45; Heb. 4:8; R.V., “Joshua”).

(2.) A Jewish Christian surnamed Justus (Col. 4:11).

Je’sus, the proper, as Christ is the official, name of our Lord. To distinguish him from others so called, he is spoken of as “Jesus of Nazareth” (John 18:7), and “Jesus the son of Joseph” (John 6:42).

This is the Greek form of the Hebrew name Joshua, which was originally Hoshea (Num. 13:8, 16), but changed by Moses into Jehoshua (Num. 13:16;

Hitchcock's Bible Names Dictionary

savior; deliverer

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%jesus
jesus99% · 979×other renderings1% · 9×

988 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject56%adverbial23%object14%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςδέbut, on the otheἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
ἐνArticle theκαίand, even, also,
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
ἐγώ
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἀποστέλλωI send forth, seὁμολογίαa profession, co
ἸησοῦςJesus,913×
what comes after →
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
Article theκαίand, even, also,εἰς
Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastΝαζωραῖοςNazareneυἱόςa son, descenden
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theοὐNeg
καίand, even, also, nam
λέγωI say, speakArticle theὁράωI see, look upon
εἰς
Article theἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemχωρίονa place, piece o

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

ConcordanceἸησοῦς · 913× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke Mark Acts Romans 1 Corinthians Philippians Ephesians 2 Corinthians Galatians 1 Thessalonians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 43 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn Drunkenness 96c. AD 40

λέγεται γὰρ ὅτι „ἀκούσας Ἰησοῦς τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ λαοῦ κεκραγότων εἶπε πρὸς Μωυσῆν·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.49c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῆς πληθύος ἀποκρίνας πᾶν τὸ μάχιμον Ἰησοῦν ἐφίστησιν αὐτῷ Ναυήκου μὲν υἱὸν φυλῆς τῆς Ἐφραιμίτιδος, ἀνδρειότατον δὲ καὶ πόνους ὑποστῆναι γενναῖον καὶ νοῆσαί τε καὶ εἰπεῖν ἱκανώτατον καὶ θρησκεύοντα τὸν θεὸν ἐκπρεπῶς καὶ Μωυσῆν διδάσκαλον τῆς…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Got. 60Arsinoites (?)AD 591–AD 602

οτο Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ … … ιλείας τοῦ θειοτάτου … … Τιβερίου τοῦ ωηις

Tyche 21 (2006), p. 1-10OxyrhynchosAD 599

r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. ὑπατείας τοῦ αὐτοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου ἡμῶν δεσπότου ἔτους ιϛ,

P.Rain.Cent. 120ArsinoitesAD 612

r ἐν ὀνόματι τοῦ κυρίου καὶ δεσπότου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν. Βασιλείας τοῦ εὐσεβεστάτου καὶ φιλανθρώπου ἡμῶν δεσπότου Φλαουίου

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
ὃςhos, hē who G3739 Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-NSM — Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-NSM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςwho1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
ἀντὶanti in view of G473 Preposition
22× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
For means instead of or in place of something, like when Jesus says to give someone your cloak if they ask for your shirt in Matthew 5:38. It can also show succession or exchange, as in Matthew 2:22.
Tyndale gloss
for
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀντί (anti) is a preposition primarily meaning 'over against' or 'opposite.' It conveys a range of meanings including 'instead of,' 'in place of,' and 'for the sake of.' In the New Testament, it appears in contexts of exchange, succession, and recompense, such as in Matthew 5:38 and Hebrews 12:16. Lexicons note its use as a prefix in various compounds, indicating contrast or substitution.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — ὑπέρ, ἀντι from a scan

Ir has been often claimed, and in the interests of an all-important truth, namely the vicarious character of the sacrifice of the death of Christ, that in such passages as Met. 4i;-93 Tit. i. 14: 1 Tim. 11. 6; Gal. 111: 13+ Luke REM 19, 203 1 Pet. 11. 21: 11.133 iv.1; Rom. v.38; John x. 15, in all of which Christ is said to have died ὑπὲρ πάντων, UTEP ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῶν προβάτων, and the like, ὑπέρ shall be accepted as equipollent with ἀντί. And then, it is further urged that, as ἀντί is the preposition first of equivalence (Homer, Jl. ix. 116, 117) and then of exchange (1 Cor. xi. 15; Heb. xii. 2, 16; Matt. v. 38), ὑπέρ must in all those passages be regarded as having the same force. Each of these, it is evident, would thus become a dictum probans for a truth, in itself most vital, namely that Christ suffered, not merely on our behalf and for our good, but also in our stead, and bearing…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀντί

(the ι is elided only in ἀνθ᾽ ὧν), prep. c. gen. (cf. MM, VGT, s.v.);

prop, in local sense, over against, opposite, hence;

instead of, in place of, for (Hom., etc.): Mt 5:38 17:27, Lk 11:11, I Co 11:15, He 12:2; c. artic. inf. (cl.), Ja 4:15; of succession, Mt 2:22; χάριν ἀ. χάριτος, Jo 1:16 (M, Pr., 100); of price in exchange, He 12:16; λύτρον ἀ. πολλῶν, Mt 20:28, Mk 10:45 (M, Pr., 105); of requital,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀντί [before ὧν, ἀνθ᾽ ; elsewhere neglecting elision] a preposition foll. by the gen. (answering to the Lat. ante and the Germ. prefixes ant-, ent-), in the use of which the N. T. writ. coincide with the Greek (W. 364 (341)); 1. prop. it seems to have signified over against, opposite to, before, in a local sense (Bttm. Gram. p. 412; [ef. Curtius § 204]). Hence 2. indicating exchange, succession, for, instead of, in place of (something). a. univ. instead of: ἀντὶ ἰχθύος ὄφιν, Lk. xi. 11; ἀντὶ περιβολαίου to serve as a covering, 1 Co. xi. 15; ἀντὶ τοῦ λέγειν, Jas. iv. 15, (ἀντὶ τοῦ with inf. often in Grk. writ. [W. 329 (309); B. 263 (226)]). b. of that for which any thing is given, received, endured: Mt. v. 38; xvii. 27 (to release me and thyself from obligation) ; Heb. xii. 2 (to obtain the joy; ef. Bleek, Liinemann, or Delitzsch ad loc.) ; of the price of sale (or purchase): Heb. xii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀντί. The primitive local force, surviving in ἔναντι and the Latin cognate ate, and conspicuous in the old Cretan dialect, leaves traces in the Kow7: there is an interesting discussion of its provenance in Wackernagel’s pamphlet, Aed/enzstica (Gottingen, 1907), p. 5 f. Its solitary appearance in an Attic inscr., and in one passage of the ‘* Halbattiker ” Xenophon, make quite natural such an abnormality in the Kowy as P Par 14° (the astronomical treatise of Eudoxus) ὅταν ἡ σελήνη τῷ ἡλίῳ ἐπισκοτήσ[ῃ] ἀντὶ τῆς ὄψεως ἡμῶν. Closely akin is the temporal use in Sy// 6164 (dialect of Cos, iii/B.c.) ayvever@ar . . ἀντὶ νυκτός, ‘ea ipsa nocte”: so Dittenberger, who compares 438% (Delphi, before B.c. 400) ἀντὶ Féreos, and Hesychius ‘‘ avrérous τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους." This may be seen still in P Lond 11719 (B.c. 8) (= III. p. 177) τιμ(ῆς) οἴνου ἀντὶ τῆς € τῶν ἐπαγομένων “‘ to cost of wine for the 5th of…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀντί (anti) — for.

ἀντί,

preposition governing genitive:—originally sense, over against. (Cf. Sanskrit ánti 'opposite', 'facing', Latin ante, etc.)

__A USAGE:

__A.I of Place, opposite, over against, formerly quoted from several places of [Refs 8th c.BC+]; so ἄντ᾽ Αἴαντος (i.e. ἄντα)[Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ἀντί is so used in [Refs 5th c.BC+]c-l68; αἱ ὀπαὶ αἱ γιγνόμεναι ἀ. τόρμων mortises facing tenons, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; ἀντὶ μαιτύρων in the presence of witnesses, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

__A.II of Time, ἀντὶ νυκτός the same night, [Refs]; ἀντὶ ϝέτεος[Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἀνθ᾽ ἡμέρας· δι᾽ ὅλης τῆς ἡμέρας, [Refs 5th c.AD+]; compare ἀντετοῦς.

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀντί

anti

a primary particle; opposite, i.e. instead or because of (rarely in

addition to):--for, in the room of. Often used in composition to

denote contrast, requital, substitution, correspondence, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀντί

Prep.

instead of, for

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀντί anti 22x

over against; hence, in correspondence to, answering to, Jn. 1:16; in place of, Mt. 2:22; in retribution or return for, Mt. 5:38; in consideration of, Heb. 12:2, 16; on account of, Mt. 17:27; ἀνθ’ ὡ, because, Lk. 1:20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀντί over against, opposite. c. gen.

c. gen. orig.:— sense over against, opposite.

Usage,

of Place, instead, in the place of, Hom., etc.

as good as, equal to, ἀντὶ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστίν he is as good as many men, Il.; ἀντὶ κασιγνήτου Od.

at the price of, for, ἀντὶ χρημάτων for money paid, Hdt., etc.

for the sake of, Soph.

to mark comparison, ἓν ἀνθ᾽ ἑνός one set against the other, compared with it, Plat.: so, after Comparatives, πλέον ἀντὶ σοῦ Soph.; also (esp. after a negative), ἄλλος ἀντ᾽ ἐμοῦ Aesch.

Position: ἀντί rarely follows its case, and then does not suffer anastrophe.

IN COMPOS.,

over against, opposite, as ἀντίπορος.

against, in opposition to, as ἀντιλέγω.

in return, as ἀντιβοηθέω.

instead, as ἀντήνωρ.

equal to, like, as ἀντίθεος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%for
for50% · 11×instead14% · 3×return for9% · 2×return5% · 1×because of5% · 1×view of5% · 1×place of5% · 1×instead of5% · 1×other renderings5% · 1×

22 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial91%second object9%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 22 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
κακόςbad, evil
μηδείςno one, nothingτὶςἀποδίδωμιI give back, ret
λύτρονa ransom, an offerin
αὐτός
ὅς
ἸησοῦςJesusἨσαῦProp
ἸουδαίαJudea
Article the
ὀφθαλμόςthe eye
εἶπονI say, speak
ἀντίin view of22×
what comes after →
ὅς
οὐNegὅσοςArticle the
Article the
πατήρfather, Father, πρόκειμαιI am set beforeλέγωI say, speak
κακόςbad, evil
ἀποδίδωμιI give back, retτὶςDisj
πολύςmuch, many, often
ὀφθαλμόςthe eye
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀντί · 22× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke 1 Peter Hebrews 1 Corinthians 1 Thessalonians 2 Thessalonians Acts Ephesians James John Mark
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 182 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.127c. AD 75–95

Ταρσὸς γὰρ παρʼ αὐτοῖς τῶν πόλεων ἡ ἀξιολογωτάτη καλεῖται μητρόπολις οὖσα τὸ ταῦ πρὸς τὴν κλῆσιν ἀντὶ τοῦ θῆτα μεταβαλόντων.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 16.10c. AD 96

καὶ δώσω τοὺς πονηροὺς ἀντὶ τῆς ταφῆς αὐτοῦ καὶ τοὺς πλουσίους ἀντὶ τοῦ θανάτου αὐτοῦ: ὅτι ἀνομίαν οὐκ ἐποίησεν, οὐδὲ εὑρέθη δόλος ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

κατὰ συγγραφὴν ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός.

P.Grenf. 2 24Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)106 BC

μὴ ποιῆι ἐν τῶι ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι καθότι προγέγραπται, ἀποτεισάτω ἐν τῶι ἐχομένωι μηνὶ παραχρῆμα ἀντὶ τῶν προκειμένων τοῦ οἴνου κεραμίων ϛ οἴνου κεράμια ἔννεα . ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἔστω

P.Grenf. 2 25Pathyris104 BC

Αἰγυπτίαν ἥν ἔθετο διʼ Ἐσπνούθιος Αἰγυπτίου μονογράφου Κροκοδίλων πόλεως Τνεφερῶτι τῇ τοῦ Νεχθανούπιος γυναικὶ ἀντὶ τῆς παρακεχωρημένης ἐν τῆι ἄνω σφραγῖδι ἀρούρας μιᾶς ἡμίσους τετάρτου ὑφʼ ὑμῶν· καὶ μὴ

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
τῆςho what G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
what19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
προκειμένηςprokeimai is lying before G4295 Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
5× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To set before or be present in someone's mind, as in Hebrews 6:18 and 12:1-2 where examples are set forth. This word means to be an example or to present oneself. It's about being a model or a representation.
Tyndale gloss
to set before
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πρόκειμαι (prokeimai) is built from the prefix πρό meaning 'before' and κεῖμαι meaning 'to lie.' It covers meanings such as being set before someone, being present, or proposed as an example or reward. In the New Testament, it appears in Hebrews 6:18, 12:1-2, and Jude 7, where it conveys the idea of something being presented or set forth.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πρό-κειμαι,

[in LXX: Ex 39:18 (36), Nu 4:7 (פָּנִים), etc.;]

used as pass. of προτίθημι;

to be set before one, to be set forth: He 6:18 12:1, 2, Ju 7.

to present oneself, be present: II Co 8:12 (v. Mey., in l.).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πρό-κειμαι ; (πρό [q. v.d.a.] and κεῖμαι) ; fr. Hom. down; 1. prop. to lie or be placed before (a person or thing), or in front (often so in Grk. writ.). 2. to be set before, i. 6. a. to be placed before the eyes, to lie in sight; to stand forth: with a pred. nom., δεῖγμα, as an example, Jude 7 (καλὸν ὑπόδειγμά σοι πρόκειται, Joseph. b. j. 6, 2, 1). Ὁ. i. q. to be appointed, destined: προκειμένη ἐλπίς, the hope open to us, offered, given, Heb. vi. 18; used of those things which by any appointment are destined to be done, borne, or attained by any one; SO προκείμενος ἀγών, Heb. xii. 1; προκειμ. χαρά, the destined joy (see ἀντί, 2 b.), ibid. 2 (the phrase τὰ ἄθλα προκεῖσθαι occurs often in prof. writ. fr. Hdt. down; cf. Bleek, Br. an die Heb. ii. 2 p. 268 sqq.). c. to be there, be present, be at hand, (so that it can become actual or available) : 2 Co. viii.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πρόκειμαι (prokeimai) — to set before.

πρόκειμαι,

used as passive of προτίθημι, to be set before one, ὀνείαθ᾽ ἑτοῖμα προκείμενα the meats laid ready, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. δαίς, δεῖπνον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄρτοι προκείμενοι shew-bread, [LXX]

2. lie exposed, ὁρέω παιδίον προκείμενον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of a tuft of wool, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἄτιμος ὧδε πρόκειμαι, says Ajax of himself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially lie dead, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; προκείμενον νέκυν laid out for burial, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to ἐξενεχθείς, [Refs 5th c.BC+] (also, to be buried first, [Refs 3rd c.AD+] to be exposed to.., [Refs 1st c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πρόκειμαι

prokeimai

from 4253 and 2749; to lie before the view, i.e. (figuratively) to be

present (to the mind), to stand forth (as an example or reward):--be

first, set before (forth).

see GREEK for 4253

see GREEK for 2749

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πρόκειμαι

v.

I am set before

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πρόκειμαι prokeimai 5x

to lie or be placed before; met. to be proposed or set before, as a duty, example, reward, etc., Heb. 6:18; 12:1, 2; Jude 7; to be at hand, be present, 2 Cor. 8:12*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πρόκειμαι ionic inf. -κέεσθαι fut. -κείσομαι used as Pass. of προτίθημι to be set before one, of meats, Hom., Hdt.

to lie exposed, of a child, Hdt.:— to lie dead, Aesch., Soph.; ὁ προκείμενος the corpse laid out for burial, Soph., etc.

to be set before all, as the prize of a contest, Hes.:—metaph. to be set before all, be set forth, proposed, Lat. in medio poni, γνῶμαι τρεῖς προεκέατο three opinions were set forth, proposed, Hdt., etc.:—of contests, struggles, πόνος τε καὶ ἀγὼν πρόκειται Plat.:—in partic., ἄεθλος προκείμενος a task proposed, Hdt., etc.; τὰ προκείμενα, opp. to μέλλοντα, Soph.; τὸ προκείμενον πρῆγμα the matter in hand, Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PNP-GSF — Verb · present · no voice stated · participle · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PNP-GSF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: middle or passive depoNent Mood: Participle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

be-for': The translation of a great variety of Hebrew and Greek words. "Haran died before (the English Revised Version "in the presence of," literally "before the face of") his father Terah" (Ge 11:28). To be "before" God is to enjoy His favor (Ps 31:22). "The Syrians before" (Isa 9:12 the Revised Version, margin "on the east," as "behind," owing to the position of Canaan, relative to Syria, implies the west).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%lying before
lying before40% · 2×present20% · 1×being set before20% · 1×set forth as20% · 1×

5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 4 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb80%object20%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
κρατέωI lay hold of, oτρέχωI run, exercise ἀντί
προθυμίαinclination, readine
Article the
ἕτεροςanother, different
σάρξflesh, body
πρόκειμαιis lying before
what comes after →
καθόas, according as
ἐάνCond
ἐλπίςhope, expectation
ἐγώ
ἀγώνa contest
αὐτός
χαράjoy, gladness
δεῖγμαan example, type
πῦρfire, trials

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπρόκειμαι · 5× in the New Testament
Hebrews 2 Corinthians Jude
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.4c. AD 40

εἰ δὲ μὴ ἀλληγορήσειέ τις, ἀδύνατον παραδέξασθαι τὸ προκείμενον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.14c. AD 75–95

τὸ σύνολον δὲ μάλιστά τις ἂν ἐκ ταύτης μάθοι τῆς ἱστορίας ἐθελήσας αὐτὴν διελθεῖν, ὅτι τοῖς μὲν θεοῦ γνώμῃ κατακολουθοῦσι καὶ τὰ καλῶς νομοθετηθέντα μὴ τολμῶσι παραβαίνειν πάντα κατορθοῦται πέρα πίστεως καὶ γέρας εὐδαιμονία πρόκειται παρὰ θεοῦ·

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 63.1c. AD 96

Θεμιτὸν οὖν ἐστὶν τοῖς τοιούτοις καὶ τοσούτοις ὑποδείγμασιν προσελθόντας ὑποθεῖναι τὸν τράχηλον καὶ τὸν τῆς ὑπακοῆς τόπον ἀναπληρῶσαι, ὅπως ἡσυχάσαντες τῆς ματαίας στάσεως ἐπὶ τὸν προκείμενον ἡμῖν ἐν ἀληθείᾳ σκοπὸν δίχα παντὸς μώμου καταντήσωμεν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 29Pathyris106 BC

ιγ τοῦ καὶ ι ἔτους· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶι ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένωι χρόνωι καθότι πρόκειται, ἀποτεισάτωι ἐν τῶ Φαμενὼθ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας … · ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἔστω Σεννήσει ἐκ

P.Grenf. 2 32Pathyris102 BC

ὠνῆς Ἐτπεσοῦχος Νεθανούπιος γῆς ἠπείρου σιτοφόρου ἄρουραν α, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ τῆς προκειμένης συνγραφῆς, ἣν ἠγόρασεν παρὰ Πετεαρσεμθέως τοῦ Πανεβχούνιος πρὸς χαλκοῦ τάλαντα β, τέλος Ασ, γίνονται

γῆς, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς καὶ οἰκία, ὧν τριῶν τὸ ἐπιβάλλον μοι τέταρτον, ὧν αἱ γειτνίαι πρόκεινται. ἐπρίαντο Ἑτπεσοῦχος Νεχθανούφιος καὶ οἱ τούτου ἀδελφοὶ πρὸς χαλκοῦ ταλάντων δέκα . προπωλητὴς καὶ

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
αὐτῷautos Him G846 Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
5,550× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing, like 'he', 'she', or 'it'. It is used in the Bible to emphasize a person or thing, like in John 2:25 where it says 'he himself knew'.
Amplified meaning
a goal to strive for
Tyndale gloss
it/s/he
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αὐτός, -ή, -ό,

determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).

Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);

self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.

αὐτός

(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),

I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αὐτός

autos

from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea

of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used

(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the

proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,

the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-

)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,

- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),

those, together, very, which. Compare 848.

see GREEK for 109

see GREEK for 1438

see GREEK for 848

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό

Pers.pr.

he, she, it, they, them, same

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αὐτός autos 5x

self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.

self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:

oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.

of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.

by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.

in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-DSM — Personal pronoun · dative · singular · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-DSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
52%him
him52% · 3025×them25% · 1488×it6% · 323×her4% · 250×other renderings10% · 587×other renderings3% · 188×

5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object33%adverbial28%indirect object19%subject18%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also,δέbut, on the otheἸησοῦςJesus
πρός
λέγωI say, speakἔρχομαιI come, goδέbut, on the othe
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςεὑρίσκωI find
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakοὗτοςὁράωI see, look upon
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύθεόςGod, a god
αὐτόςHim5550×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusμαθητήςa learner, disciθεόςGod, a god
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςὅς
εἰς
Article theδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnesἹεροσόλυμαJerusalem

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαὐτός · 5,550× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew John Mark Acts Revelation Romans Hebrews 1 John 1 Corinthians Ephesians 2 Corinthians

19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
χαρᾶςchara joy G5479 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
59× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Joy, or chara, means a deep and lasting happiness, like the joy felt by the shepherds in Luke 1:14 when they heard about Jesus' birth.
Amplified meaning
a deep and lasting happiness
Tyndale gloss
joy
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

χαρά (chara) means joy or delight, derived from the verb χαίρω (to rejoice). It appears frequently in the New Testament, often contrasting with sorrow or sadness. Notable references include Luke 1:14 and Philippians 1:25. The word encompasses both the feeling of joy and its causes, such as faith or good news.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

χαρά, -ᾶς, ἡ

(< χαίρω),

[in LXX for שִׂמְחָה, שָׂשׂוֹן, etc. ;]

joy, delight: Lk 1:14 15:7, 10, Jo 15:11 16:22, 24 17:13, Ac 8:8, II Co 1:24 7:13 8:2, Ga 5:22, Col 1:11, Phl 2:2, I Jo 1:4, II Jo 12; opp. to κατήφεια, Ja 4:9; to λύπη, Jo 16:20; χ. τῆς πίστεως, Phl 1:25; ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι (χαίρειν, q.v.), χαρᾷ, Jo 3:29, I Pe 1:8; χ. ἔχειν, Phm 7; πληροῦν (-οῦσθαι) χαρᾶς, Ac 13:52, Ro 15:13, II Ti 1:4; ποιεῖν χ. μεγάλην, Ac 15:3; ἀπὸ τῆς χ., Mt…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χαρά, -as, ἡ, (χαίρω), fr. Aeschyl. and Soph. down, Sept. for ANDY and ww, joy, gladness ; ΤΠ 1] "τ σὲ 14; χν. 7,10; Jn. χν. 11; xvi. 22, 24; xvii. 18; Acts viii. 8; 2 Co. vii. 13; viii. 2; Gal. v. 22; Col.i.11; Phil. ii 2; 1Jn.i.4; 2Jn.12; opp. ἴο κατήφεια, Jas. iv.9; opp. to λύπη, Jn. xvi. 20; 2 Co. ii.3; Heb. xii.11; ὑμῶν, 1. 6. the joy received from you, 2 Co. i. 24 (opp. to the ‘sorrow’ which Paul on returning to Corinth would both experience and give, ii. 1-3) ; χαρὰ τῆς πίστεως, springing from faith, Phil. i. 25 ; χαίρειν χαρὰν pey- Mt. ii. 10 [W. § 32, 2; B.131, 5]; ἀγαλλιᾶσθαι χαρᾷ, 1 Pet. i. 8; χαρὰν [Rec." χάριν] πολλὴν ἔχειν ἐπί with a dat. of the thing, Philem. 7; πληροῦν τινα χαρᾶς, Ro. xv. 13; πληροῦσθαι χαρᾶς, Acts xiii. 52; 2 Tim. i. 4; ποιεῖν τινε χαρὰν μεγάλην, Acts xv. 33; ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς. for joy, Mt. xiii. 44; Lk. xxiv. 41; Acts xii. 14; ἐν χαρᾷ (ἔρχεσθαι), Ro. xv.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χαρά, “joy”: BGU IV. 11415 (B.c. 14) μετὰ] πολλῇς [χ]αρᾶς, P Fay 20! (iii/iv A.D.) an edict, perhaps of the Emperor Julian (see Avchiv ii. p. 169) which begins—8[rrw]s μὴ διὰ τὸ τῆς χαρᾶς TH[s] ἑαυτῶν δήλωσιν ποιήσασθαι ε. . . νην ἐπ᾽ ἐμοὶ παρελθόντι ἐπὶ τὴν ἀρχὴν . . ., ‘lest for the sake . οὗ making a manifestation of their joy at my accession to empire . . .” (Edd.), P Iand I. 1318 (iv/a.p.) ἵνα μετὰ χαρᾶς σε ἀπολάβωμεν (cf. Mt 1339), and the inscr. Preisigke 991° (A.D. 290) μετὰ πάσης χαρᾶς Kal ἱλαρίας. In the Christian P Oxy VIII. 1162° Λέων πρεσβύτερος τοῖς πρεσβυτὶ ἔϊροις καὶ διακώνοις ἀ[γ]απητοῖ!ς] ἀδελφοῖς ἐν κ(υρίγῳ θ(ε)ῷ χαρᾷ χα[ί]ρειν, ‘‘ Leon, presbyter, to the presbyters and deacons, beloved brothers in the Lord God, fullness of joy ”’(Ed.), we have an ex. of the cogn. dat., as in Jn 355: for a corresponding usage in the LXX, cf. Thackeray Gr. i. p. 48 ff. Χαρά is common…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χαρά (chara) — joy.

χᾰρά, ἡ:

(χαίρω):— joy, delight, first in [Refs 7th c.BC+] of a hungry man, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; with genitive objecti, joy in or at a thing, μελέων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πρὸς χαρὰν λόγων in accordance with joyous tidings, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κέρτομος θεοῦ χ. a joy sent by some mocking god, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; λέγεις μοι χαράν wishest me joy, [NT+5th c.BC+]with joy, [LXX+5th c.BC+]; χαρᾶς ὕπο [Refs 5th c.BC+]; opposed to λύπη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. in concrete sense, a joy, of persons, χ. μου [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

χαρά

chara

from 5463; cheerfulness, i.e. calm delight:--gladness, X greatly, (X

be exceeding) joy(-ful, -fully, -fulness, -ous).

see GREEK for 5463

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χαρά, ᾶς, ἡ

n.f.

joy, gladness

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χαρά chara 59x

joy, gladness, rejoicing, Mt. 2:10; 13:20, 44; 28:8; meton, joy, cause of joy, occasion of rejoicing, Lk. 2:10; Phil. 4:1; 1 Thess. 2:19, 20; bliss, Mt. 25:21, 23

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

χαρά χα^ρά, ἡ, χαίρω joy, delight, Trag., etc.;—but c. gen. objecti, joy in or at a thing, Eur.; κέρτομος θεοῦ χ. a joy sent by some god to grieve my heart, id. Eur.:— χαρᾷ with joy, Aesch.; so, χαρᾶς ὕπο id. Aesch.; σὺν χαρᾷ Soph.

a joy, of persons, NTest.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

joi (simchah; chara):

1. Terms:

The idea of joy is expressed in the Old Testament by a wealth of synonymous terms that cannot easily be differentiated. The commonest is simchah (1Sa 18:6, etc.), variously translated in English Versions of the Bible "joy," "gladness," "mirth"; from sameah, properly "to be bright," "to shine" (Pr 13:9, "The light of the righteous rejoiceth," literally, "is bright"), but generally used figuratively "to rejoice," "be glad" (Le 23:40 and very frequent).

Other nouns are masos and sason, both from sus, properly "to spring," "leap," hence, "exult," "rejoice"; rinnah, "shouting." "joy"; gil, from verb gil or gul, "to go in a circle," hence, "be excited" (dancing round for joy), "rejoice." In the New…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Attributed to God De 28:63; 30:9; Jer 32:41

→ In heaven Lu 15:10-32

→ UNCLASSIFIED SCRIPTURES RELATING TO De 12:18; 1Sa 2:1; 1Ch 16:27; 2Ch 7:10; Ezr 6:22; Ne 8:10,12; 12:43; Job 8:21; 22:21,26; 33:26; Ps 2:11; 4:7; 5:11; 9:2,14; 13:5; 14:7; 16:5,6,8,9,11; 17:15; 19:8; 20:5; 21:1,6; 28:7…

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- God gives

Ec 2:26; Ps 4:7

- Christ appointed to give

Isa 61:3

- Is a fruit of the Spirit

Ga 5:22

- The gospel, good tidings of

Lu 2:10,11

- God's word affords

Ne 8:12; Jer 15:16

- The gospel to be received with

1Th 1:6

- Promised to saints

Ps 132:16; Isa 35:10; 55:12; 56:7

- Prepared for saints

Ps 97:11

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%joy
joy100% · 59×

59 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial53%subject24%object12%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 59 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἵναin order that, sκαίand, even, also,ἀπό
μετά
εὐθέωςimmediately, sooσύἀκούωI hear, listen
καίand, even, also, nam
φόβοςfear, terror, reεἰρήνηpeace, peace of προκοπήprogress, advanc
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
σύμετά
αὐτός
ἀκούωI hear, listenπρόκειμαιI am set before
χαράjoy59×
what comes after →
Article the
ἐμόςκύριοςlord, Lord, mastδέησιςsupplication, pr
μέγας
σφόδραexceedingly, greτρέχωI run, exercise ὅστις
σύ
καίand, even, also,πληρόωI fill, fulfill,οὐδείςno one, none, no
καίand, even, also, nam
θαυμάζωI wonder, admireπνεῦμαwind, breath, spεἰρήνηpeace, peace of
ἐν
Article theπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceχαρά · 59× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew 2 Corinthians Philippians 1 Thessalonians Acts Hebrews Romans James 1 John 1 Peter
Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 20 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Ignatius of Antioch The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.45c. AD 40

ἀρετῇ δὲ ἁρμόττον εἰρήνη καὶ εὐπάθεια καὶ χαρά, ἐν οἷς τὸ τρυφᾶν ὡς ἀληθῶς ἐστι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.126c. AD 75–95

ποιήσαντος δὲ τοῦ οἰκέτου τὰ ἐντεταλμένα μεθʼ ἡμέραν οὐδὲν τούτων εἰδότες οἱ τοῦ Ἰακώβου παῖδες ἀπῄεσαν ἀπειληφότες τὸν Σεμεῶνα καὶ διπλῆν χαρὰν χαίροντες ἐπί τε τούτῳ κἀπὶ τῷ Βενιαμὶν ἀποκομίζειν τῷ πατρί, καθὼς ὑπέσχοντο.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 63.2c. AD 96

χαρὰν γὰρ καὶ ἀγαλλίασιν ἡμῖν παρέξετε, ἐὰν ὑπήκοοι γενόμενοι τοῖς ὑφ̓ ἡμῶν γεγραμμένοις διὰ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος ἐκκόψητε τὴν ἀθέμιτον τοῦ ζήλους ὑμῶν ὀργὴν κατὰ τὴν ἔντευξιν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 1st c. BC
BGU 4 1156 Vo descr.Schreibort: Alexandria; Fundort: Abusir el-Melek15 BC–14 BC

κόλλημα Πρωτάρχῳ τῷ ἐπὶ τοῦ κριτηρίου παρὰ Χαρᾶς τῆς Μενελάου μετὰ κυρίου Ἀκουσιλάου τοῦ Ἐλυρίου καὶ παρὰ Νικαρίου τῆς Πτολεμαίου Περσίνης μετὰ

BGU 4 1141Alexandria15 BC–14 BC

ἐπιστολὴν μόνην η … διεστάμεθα ἀφʼ ὡς ἀπα … ων. διὸ καὶ μετὰ πολλῆς χαρᾶς κατέσχον αὐτοὺς … … δὲ τούτους καὶ τὰ δέοντα … … ου ποιεῖν κατανθρωπίζεται.

P.Bad. 2 37Alexandria (?)AD 108

ἐποίησα, ἵνα μὴ ἐπιγραφήν σοι παραλίπῃς διὰ ἐμέ. ἔρρωσο ἄδελφε τιμιώτατε πανοικί … εδη χαράν Παχὼν θ ἔτους ἐν … υ Τραιανοῦ Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
ὑπέμεινενhupomenō endured G5278 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
17× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To remain or endure through difficult situations, like in Matthew 10:22 and Romans 8:24. It means to have the strength to bear trials and persevere, as seen in the lives of Jesus and the apostles.
Amplified meaning
to remain under
Tyndale gloss
to remain/endure
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὑπομένω (i.e., *hupomeno*) is built from the prefix ὑπο- (under) and the verb μένω (to remain). It covers meanings such as to stay behind, endure, and bear patiently. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts of waiting and enduring trials, notably in Romans and James, with various lexicons noting its use in both transitive and intransitive forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὑπο-μένω

[in LXX chiefly for קָוָה, also for יָחַל hi., etc. ;]

in-trans., to stay behind: seq. ἐν, Lk 2:43; ἐκεῖ, Ac 17:14.

Trans.,

c. acc, to await, wait for: Ro 8:24 (Hom., Hdt., Xen., al.);

of things, to bear patiently, endure: absol., Mt 10:22 24:13, Mk 13:13, II Ti 2:12, Ja 5:11, I Pe 2:20; τ. θλίψει (dat. of circumstance), Ro 12:12; seq. εἰς, He 12:7; c. acc rei,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὑπο-μένω ; impf. ὑπέμενον ; fut. 2 pers. plur. bropeveire ; 1 aor. ὑπέμεινα; pf. ptep. ὑπομεμενηκώς ; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for map, Tan, OM; 1. to remain i.e. tarry behind: foll. by év with a dat. of the place, Lk. ii. 43; ἐκεῖ, Acts xvii. 14. 2. to remain i.e. abide, not recede or flee; trop. a. to persevere: absol. and emphat., under misfortunes and trials to hold fast to one’s faith in Christ [R. V. commonly endure], Mt. x. 22; xxiv. 13; Mk. xiii. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 12 [cf. vs. 10 in b.]; Jas. v. 11; with τῇ θλίψει added, when trial assails [A. V. in tribulation (i. e. dat. of cireumstances or condition)], (cf. Kiihner § 426, 3 [Jelf § 603, 1]), Ro. xii. 12 (quite different is ὑπομένειν τῷ κυρίῳ, ΤῊ 2 Onin, Lam. iii. 21,24; Mic. vii.7; 2K. vi. 33; my 727, Ps. xxxii. (xxxiii.) 20, to esse faithfully to [A. V. wait for] the Lord, where the dat. depends on the verb contrary to Grk. usage…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὑπομένω. For the trans. use of this verb ‘‘bear up,” ‘‘endure,” cf. PSI IV. 4351 (B.c. 258-7) (= Deissmann ZAZ?, p. 153) προσευξάμενος δίὲ] αὐ[τῶι, é]a[p με] ὑγιάσηι, διότι ὑπομενῶ τὴν ληιτο[υργ]ΐίαν, ‘but having prayed to him, if he would heal me, I said that I would endure my ministry,” P Oxy II. 237 4) 88 (Ἂν Ὁ, 186) δίκην ὑπομενοῦσι τὴν προσήκουσαν, “*will suffer the due penalty of their disobedience” (Edd.), P Hamb I. 22? (Christian—iv/a.D.) ὃς κακὰ πόλλ᾽ ὑπέμεινε μιῆς ἐπίηρα θυγάτρος, ‘who suffered many ills for the sake of his only daughter,” P Oxy IX. 11864 (iv./A.p.) τὸ τὴν διὰ τῶν ἱμάντων... αἰκείαν ὑπομένειν ἐστὶν μὲν Kal ἐπὶ τῶν δουλικὴν τύχην εἰληχότων ἀνιαρόν, ‘subjection to the punishment of scourging is even for those of servile estate lamentable ’’ (Ed.), cf. 7 τοιαύτην ὕβρειν ὑπομένειν, and 26. VI. 904° (v/A.D.) αὐτὸν τὸ ἀζήμιον πληροῖν τοῖ[ς] τὴν βλάβην ὑπομένουσιν…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὑπομένω (hupomenō) — to remain/endure.

ὑπομένω,

future -μενῶ conjecture in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:— stay behind, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπομεινον ἕως ἂν παραγένηται [Refs 3rd c.BC+]: also, remain alive, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: of things, to be left behind, remain, ὑπέμεινε τὸ παχύτερον [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: generally, to be permanent, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II. transitive,

II.1. with accusative person, abide or await another, διὰ τοῦτό σε οὐχ ὑπέμενον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; especially await his attack, bide the onset, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑ. τὰς Σειρῆνας abide their presence, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of evils, κακῶν ὅσα ἡμᾶς ἐν ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ ὑ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὑπομένω

hupomeno

from 5259 and 3306; to stay under (behind), i.e. remain; figuratively,

to undergo, i.e. bear (trials), have fortitude, persevere:--abide,

endure, (take) patient(-ly), suffer, tarry behind.

see GREEK for 5259

see GREEK for 3306

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὑπομένω

v.

I remain behind, endure

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὑπομένω hypomenō 17x

intrans. to remain or stay behind, when others have departed, Lk. 2:43; trans. to bear up under, endure, suffer patiently, 1 Cor. 13:7; Heb. 10:32; absol. to continue firmly, hold out, remain constant, persevere, Mt. 10:22; 24:13

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὑπομένω fut. -μενῶ aor1 ὑπ-έμεινα to stay behind, survive, Od., Hdt., attic

trans.,

c. acc. pers. to await another, to await his attack, bide the onset, Il., Hdt.; ὑπ. τὰς Σειρῆνας to abide their presence, Xen.

c. acc. rei, to be patient under, abide patiently, submit to, Hdt., Thuc., etc.; ὑπ. τὴν κρίσιν to await one's trial, Aeschin.: to wait for, τὴν ἑορτήν Thuc.

absol. to stand one's ground, stand firm, Il., Hdt., etc.; ὑπομένων καρτερεῖν to endure patiently, Plat.

c. inf. to submit or dare to do a thing, wait to do, persist in doing, like Lat. sustinere, Od., Xen.

so with part. relating to the subject, εἰ ὑπομενέουσι χεῖρας ἀνταειρόμενοι if they shall dare to lift their hands, Hdt.; ὑπομένει ὠφελούμενος he submits to be helped, Plat.:—with part. relating to the object, ὑπ. Ξέρξεα ἐπιόντα to await his attack…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3S — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · singular
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
24%having endured
having endured24% · 4×endures12% · 2×remained6% · 1×being patient6% · 1×i endure6% · 1×we endure6% · 1×you endured6% · 1×endured6% · 1×other renderings29% · 5×

17 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 17 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ἐλπίζωI hope, hope forοὗτος
αὐτός
ὑποστρέφωI turn back, ret
θάλασσαthe sea, lake
Article the
θλῖψιςpersecution, afflict
Article the
ὑπομένωendured17×
what comes after →
εἰς
τέλοςan end, purpose,
Article the
προσευχήprayer, a place ὑπομονήendurance, stead
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article the
τέDisj
Article the
διά
Article the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὑπομένω · 17× in the New Testament
Hebrews 1 Peter 2 Timothy James Matthew 1 Corinthians Acts Luke Mark Romans
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Epistle of Barnabas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.41c. AD 40

πάντα γὰρ ὅσα πάσχει ἡ αἴσθησις, οὐκ ἄνευ νοῦ ὑπομένει, πηγὴ γὰρ οὗτός ἐστιν αὐτῇ

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.135c. AD 75–95

Ναβρώδης δὲ Χούσου υἱὸς ὑπομείνας παρὰ Βαβυλωνίοις ἐτυράννησεν, ὡς καὶ πρότερόν μοι δεδήλωται.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 5.1c. AD 100

Εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὑπέμεινεν ὁ κύριος παραδοῦναι τὴν σάρκα εἰς καταφθοράν, ἵνα τῇ ἀφέσει τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἁγνισθῶμεν, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν τῷ αἵματι τοῦ ῥαντίσματος αὐτοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 1st c. BC
P. Münch. 3 52Herakleopolites176 BC–127 BC

τάλαντα μ Δυο, ὧν καὶ χ … χειρόγραφον ἀτοῦ ἔχω, ταύτας ἀπαιτούμενος πλεονάκις οὐχ ὑπομένει ἀποδιδόναι, ἀλλὰ διαπλανᾷ με. διὸ ἀξιῶ, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι ἀσφαλίσασθαι αὐτὸν μέχρι τοῦ τὴν

P.Oxy. 59 3992AlexandriaAD 101–AD 200

καὶ νῦν ἐν τοῖς περὶ Διογᾶτος ἀντιδικεῖ μοι. τοῦτο ὑμᾶς μαρτύρομαι μόνον. οὐ γὰρ ὑπομένω αὐτὸν μιμήσασθαι.

P.Oslo 3 93Oasis ParvaAD 211–AD 212

ἐκτελοῦντα τὴν νυκτοφυλακίαν, ὡς πρόκειται. εἰ δὲ μή, ἐγὼ αὐτὸς τὸν ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ λόγον ὑπομενῶ, ἢ ἔνοχος εἴην τῷ ὅρκῳ. ἔτους κ Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Μάρκου Αὐρηλίου Σεουήρου Ἀντωνίνου Παρθικοῦ

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
σταυρὸνstauros [the] cross G4716 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
27× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A stauros was a cross or stake, used by the Romans as an instrument of capital punishment, and the specific cross on which Jesus was crucified, as described in Matthew 27:32 and other passages.
Amplified meaning
an instrument of capital punishment
Tyndale gloss
cross
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σταυρός refers to an upright stake or post, commonly understood as a cross, particularly in the context of crucifixion. It is used in the New Testament to denote the instrument of Christ's execution and metaphorically represents self-denial and the atonement associated with His death. The term appears in several verses, including Matthew 27:32 and Philippians 2:8, and has implications for bearing one's own cross in a spiritual sense.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* σταυρός, -οῦ, ὁ

an upright pale or stake (Hom., Hdt., Thuc., al.)

In late writers (Diod., Plut., al.) of the Roman instrument of crucifixion, the Cross: of the Cross on which Christ suffered, Mt 27:32, 40, 42, Mk 15:21, 30, 32, Lk 23:26, Jo 19:17, 19, 25, 31, Col 2:14, He 12:2; θάνατος σταυροῦ, Phl 2:8; τ. αἷμα τοῦ σ., Col 1:20. Metaph., in proverbial sayings: αἴρειν (λαμβάνειν, βαστάζειν) τὸν σ., Mt 10:38 16:24, Mk 8:34 10:21, 15:21, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σταυρός, -ov, ὁ, [fr. ἵστημι (root sta); cf. Lat. stauro, Eng. staff (see Skeat, Etym. Dict. s. v.); Curtius § 216; Vaniéek p. 1126]; 1. an upright stake, esp. a pointed one, (Hom., Hdt., Thue., Xen.). 2. a cross; a. the well-known instrument of most cruel and ignominious punishment, borrowed by the Greeks and Romans from the Pheenicians; to it were affixed among the Romans, down to the time of Constantine the Great, the guiltiest criminals, particularly the basest slaves, robbers, the authors and abetters of insurrections, and occasionally in the provinces, at the arbitrary pleasure of the governors, upright and peaceable men also, and even Roman citizens themselves; cf. Win. RWB.s. v. Kreuzigung; Merz in Herzog ed. 1 [(cf. Schaff-Herzog) also Schultze in Herzog ed. 2], 5. v. Kreuz; Keim iii. p. 409 864. [Eng. trans. vi. 138; BB.DD. 8. vv. Cross, Crucifixion; O. Zéckler, Das Kreuz…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

σταυρός, ** cross. » The metaph. use of σταυρός in Lk 958, ἀράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν, finds an interesting illustration in a Christian prayer of ἵνίν a.D., P Oxy VII. τοςϑ3 6 O(€d)s τῶν παρακειμένων σταυρῶν, βοήθησον τὸν δοῦλόν σου Amdotay, “Ὁ God of the crosses that are laid upon us, help thy servant Apphouas’”’ (Ed.). ‘‘ God is apparently thought of as at once the sender and mitigator of trials” (Ed.). In P Lond 19178 (c. A.D. 330-40) the writer calls upon his correspondent—6rrws ἐφάρῃς τὰς χῖράς σίου πρὸς τὸν δεσπότην θαιὸν ὡς τοίπως σταυρῷ, “that you may lift up your hands to our Master God, in the semblance of a cross’’: see the editor's note and cf. 79. The sign of the cross is frequently prefixed to Christian letters, e.g. P Iand I. 16 (v/vi A.D.), and in the late P Lips I. 901° (Byz.) the scribe states that he has written the document for the original sender, but that…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σταυρός (stauros) — cross.

σταυρός, ὁ,

upright pale or stake, σταυροὺς ἐκτὸς ἔλασσε διαμπερὲς ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα πυκνοὺς καὶ θαμέας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of piles driven in to serve as a foundation, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. cross, as the instrument of crucifixion, [NT+1st c.BC+]; σ. λαμβάνειν, ἆραι, βαστάζειν, metaphorically of voluntary suffering, [NT]: its form was represented by the Greek letter T, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. b pale for impaling a corpse, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

σταυρός

stauros

from the base of 2476; a stake or post (as set upright), i.e.

(specially), a pole or cross (as an instrument of capital punishment);

figuratively, exposure to death, i.e. self-denial; by implication, the

atonement of Christ:--cross.

see GREEK for 2476

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σταυρός, οῦ, ὁ

n.m.

a cross

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σταυρός stauros 27x

a stake; a cross, Mt. 27:32, 40, 42; Phil. 2:8; by impl. the punishment of the cross, crucifixion, Eph. 2:16; Heb. 12:2; meton. the crucifixion of Christ in respect of its import, the doctrine of the cross, 1 Cor. 17:18; Gal. 5:11; 6:12, 14; met. to take up, or bear one’s cross, to be ready to encounter any extremity, Mt. 10:38; 16:24

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

σταυρός σταυρός, οῦ, ὁ, στῆναι an upright pale or stake, Hom., etc.: of piles driven in to serve as a foundation, Hdt., Thuc.

the Cross, NTest.: its form was represented by the Greek letter Τ, Luc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

(stauros, "a cross," "the crucifixion"; skolops, "a stake," "a pole"): The name is not found in the Old Testament. It is derived from the Latin word crux. In the Greek language it is stauros, but sometimes we find the word skolops used as its Greek equivalent. The historical writers, who transferred the events of Roman history into the Greek language, make use of these two words. No word in human language has become more universally known than this word, and that because all of the history of the world since the death of Christ has been measured by the distance which separates events from it. The symbol and principal content of the Christian religion and of Christian civilization is found in this one word.

1. Forms of the Cross:

The cross occurs in at least four different forms:

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Cross

In the New Testament the instrument of crucifixion, and hence used for the crucifixion of Christ itself (Eph. 2:16; Heb. 12:2; 1 Cor. 1:17, 18; Gal. 5:11; 6:12, 14; Phil. 3:18). The word is also used to denote any severe affliction or trial (Matt. 10:38; 16:24; Mark 8:34; 10:21).

The forms in which the cross is represented are these:

1. The crux simplex (I), a “single piece without transom.”

2. The crux decussata (X), or St. Andrew’s cross.

3. The crux commissa (T), or St. Anthony’s cross.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

As the emblem of a slave’s death and a murderer’s punishment, the cross was naturally looked upon with the profoundest horror. But after the celebrated vision of Constantine, he ordered his friends to make a cross of gold and gems, such as he had seen, and "the towering eagles resigned the flags unto the cross," and "the tree of cursing and shame" "sat upon the sceptres and was engraved and signed on the foreheads of kings." (Jer. Taylor, "Life of Christ," iii., xv. 1.) The new standards were called by the name Labarum, and may be seen on the coins of Constantine the Great and his nearer successors. The Latin cross on which our Lord suffered, was int he form of the letter T, and had an upright above the cross-bar, on which the "title" was placed. There was a projection from the central stem, on which the body of the sufferer rested. This was to prevent the weight of the body from…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A kind of gibbet made of pieces of wood placed transversely, whether crossing at right angles, one at the top of the other, T, or below the top, t, or diagonally, X. Death by the cross was a punishment of the meanest slaves, and was a mark of infamy, De 21:23 Ga 3:13. This punishment was so common among the Romans, that pains, afflictions, troubles, etc., were called "crosses." Our Savior says that his disciples must take up the cross and follow Him. Though the cross is the sign of ignominy and sufferings, yet it is the badge and glory of the Christian.

The common way of crucifying was by fastening the criminal with nails, one through each hand, and one through both his feet, or through each foot. Sometimes they were bound with cords, which, though it seems gentler, because it…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%cross
cross93% · 26×cross!7% · 2×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial44%object37%subject11%predicate4%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 27 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αἴρωI raise, lift upἀπόαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
θάνατοςdeath
ὑπομένωI remain behind, end
χαράjoy, gladness
σταυρός[the] cross27×
what comes after →
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,κατάδιά
Article the
Χριστόςanointed, the MeἸησοῦςJesusσῶμαbody, flesh
καίand, even, also, nam
πιστεύωI believe, have
ἵναin order that, so th
ὁράωI see, look upon
ἑαυτοῦ
καίand, even, also,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσταυρός · 27× in the New Testament
Matthew John Mark Galatians Luke 1 Corinthians Colossians Philippians Ephesians Hebrews
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
The Epistle of Barnabas Josephus Ignatius of Antioch Philo of Alexandria Polycarp
Philo of AlexandriaAgainst Flaccus 72c. AD 40

τῶν δ’ ὡς ἀληθῶς πεπονθότων φίλοι καὶ συγγενεῖς, ὅτι μόνον ταῖς τῶν προσηκόντων συμφοραῖς συνήλγησαν, ἀπήγοντο, ἐμαστιγοῦντο, ἐτροχίζοντο, καὶ μετὰ πάσας τὰς αἰκίας, ὅσας ἐδύνατο χωρῆσαι τὰ σώματα αὐτοῖς, ἡ τελευταία καὶ ἔφεδρος τιμωρία σταυρὸς ἦν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 11.261c. AD 75–95

Σαβουχάδας δὲ τῶν εὐνούχων εἷς ἰδὼν τὸν σταυρὸν ἐν τῇ Ἀμάνου οἰκίᾳ πεπηγότα, ὃν ἐπὶ Μαρδοχαῖον παρεσκευάκεισαν, καὶ πυθόμενος παρά τινος τῶν οἰκετῶν, ἐπὶ τίνα τοῦτον ἦσαν ἑτοιμασάμενοι, γνούς, ὡς ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς βασιλίσσης θεῖον, τὸν γὰρ Ἀμάνην μέλλειν…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 8.1c. AD 100

Τίνα δὲ δοκεῖτε τύπον εἶναι, ὅτι ἐντέταλται τῷ Ἰσραὴλ προσφέρειν δάμαλιν τοὺς ἄνδρας, ἐν οἷς εἰσὶν ἁμαρτίαι τέλειαι, καὶ σφάξαντας κατακαίειν, καὶ αἴρειν τότε τὴν σποδὸν παιδία καὶ βάλλειν εἰς ἄγγη καὶ περιτιθέναι τὸ ἔριον τὸ κόκκινον ἐπὶ ξύλον ʽἴδε…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
7th c. AD 8th c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.IFAO 3 34AD 38–AD 41

Γάιος Οὐιτράσιος Πωλίων λέγει· ἐὰν μὴ ἔρχηται εἰς τὸν Χινετε Ἀπίων τὸν Χινετο σταυρῶ τινεαιος κα … ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ τί γὰρ ταῦτα; τὸν Χινετο τὸν Λευκᾶς τὴν

P.Lond. 6 1917Herakleopolites bzw. KynopolitesAD 330–AD 340

παρὰ κυρίῳ θεῷ, ὅπως ἐπάρῃς τὰς χεῖράς σου πρὸς τὸν δεσπότην θεὸν ὡς τύτος σταυροῦ … … … … ζια θεῷ μεμελημένος διὰ ἐμοῦ τοῦ ταπεινοῦ καὶ ταλαιπώρου, καὶ

O.Edfou 2 313ApollonopolisAD 301–AD 700

κτῆμα τῆς κέλλης. σταυρὸς α ἡμισπ χρ vestiges χμ

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
αἰσχύνηςaischunē [its] shame G152 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
6× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Shame or disgrace is the meaning of this word, as seen in Luke 14:19 and 2 Corinthians 4:2. It can describe a feeling of guilt or embarrassment. The KJV translates it as shame or dishonesty.
Amplified meaning
disgrace
Tyndale gloss
shame
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

αἰσχύνη (aischunē) refers to shame or disgrace, encompassing both subjective feelings of embarrassment and objective dishonor. It appears in various New Testament contexts, such as in Luke 14:9 and Philippians 3:19, where it denotes things that cause shame or are shameful. The term is often compared to αἰδώς (aidōs), with some distinction in meaning, particularly regarding the anticipation of dishonor versus the feeling after an unworthy act.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — αἰσχύνη, αἰδώς, ἐντροπή from a scan

THERE was a time when αἰδώς occupied that whole domain of meaning afterwards divided between it and αἰσχύνη. It had then the same duplicity of meaning which is latent in the Latin ‘pudor,’ in our own ‘shame;’ and indeed retained a certain duplicity of meaning till the last (Euripides, Hippol. 387-389). Thus Homer, who does not know αἰσχύνη, sometimes, as at Il. v. 787, uses αἰδώς, where αἰσχύνη would, in later Greek, have certainly been employed ; but elsewhere in that sense which, at a later period, it vindicated as exclusively its own (Jl. xiii. 122; ef. Hesiod, Op. 202). And even Thucydides, in a difficult and doubtful passage where both words occur (i. 84), is by many considered to have employed them as equipollent and convertible (Donaldson, Cratylus, 3rd ed. p. 545). So too in a passage of Sophocles, where they occur close together, αἰδώς joined with φόβος, and αἰσχύνη with δέος…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

αἰσχύνη, -ης, ἡ

(< αἶσχος, shame, disgrace),

[in LXX chiefly for בּשֶׁת;]

shame (MM, VGT, s.v.): subjectively, Lk 14:19, II Co 4:2; objectively, Phl 3:19, He 12:2; as something to be ashamed of, Re 3:18; pl. (Bl., §32, 6), shameful deeds, Ju 13.†

SYN.: αἰδώς, q.v.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

αἰσχύνη, -ης, 7, (αἶσχος [cf. aicxpds}); 1. subjectively, the confusion of one who is ashamed of anything, sense of shame: er αἰσχύνης suffused with shame, Lk. xiv. 9; τὰ κρυπτὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης those things which shame conceals, opp. to φανέρωσις τῆς ἀληθείας, 2 Co. iv. 2 (evil arts of which one ought tobe ashamed). 2. objectively, ignominy: visited on one by the wicked, Heb. xii. 2; which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 19 (opp. to δόξα). 3. a thing to be ashamed of: ἡ αἰσχύνη τῆς γυμνότητος (gen. of appos.).nakedness to be ashamed of, Rev. iii. 18, ef. xvi. 15; plur. [ef. W. 176 (166)] ai αἰσχῦναι basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13. [(Aeschyl., Hdt., al.) Syn. see αἰδώς, fin.]

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

αἰσχύνη. In P Eleph 1° (a marriage contract, B.C. 311-10) (= Sedections, p. 2) provision is made that if the bride κακοτεχνοῦσα ἁλίσκηται ἐπὶ αἰσχύνηι τοῦ ἀνδρός, “shall be detected doing anything wrong to the shame of her husband,” he shall be entitled to take certain steps against her: cf. P Gen 21" (ii/B.c.) (us completed, Avchiv iii. p. 388) μηδ᾽ aifo]xtvev Μενεκράτην ὅσα φέρει ἀνδρὶ aicxivnv—the same formula in P Tebt I. 104° (B.c. 92). So P Par 47% (c. B.C. 153) (= Selections, p. 23) ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης, ‘for very shame,” P Oxy III. 47178 (ii/A.D.) ἅπαξ yap ἐν ἔθει τῆς οα[ἰσ]χύνης γενόμενον, ‘for when once accustomed to his shame.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

αἰσχύνη (aischunē) — shame.

αἰσχύν-η [ῡ], ἡ,

shame, dishonour, ἐς αἰσχύνην φέρει[Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἰσχύνην φέρει, ἔχει, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἰ. περιίσταταί με, συμβαίνει μοι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. αἰ. γυναικῶν dishonouring of women, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; γράφεσθαί τινα γένους αἰσχύνης for dishonour done to his race, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. concrete, of a person, αἰ. φίλοις, πάτρᾳ, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of a decree, [Refs]

II. shame for an ill deed, personified in [Refs 4th c.BC+]

II.2. like{αἰδώς}, sense of shame, honour, πᾶσαν αἰ. ἀφείς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; δι᾽ αἰσχύνης ἔχειν τι to be ashamed of, [Refs]; αἰσχύνην ἔχειν τινός for a thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joined with δέος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; with ἔλεος and αἰδώς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐν αἰσχύναις ἔχω I hold it…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

αἰσχύνη

aischune

from 153; shame or disgrace (abstractly or concretely):--dishonesty,

shame.

see GREEK for 153

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

αἰσχύνη, ης, ἡ

n.f.

shame

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

αἰσχύνη aischunē 6x

shame, disgrace; cause of shame, dishonorable conduct

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

αἰσχύνη αἶσχος shame done one, disgrace, dishonour, Hdt., attic

a disgrace, of a person, Aesch.

shame for an ill deed, personified in Aesch.

generally, like αἰδώς, shame, the sense of shame, Soph., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sham (bosh, "to be ashamed," bosheth, "shame," qalon; aischune, "ignominy," atimia, "dishonor," and other words): An oft-recurring word in Scripture almost uniformly bound up with a sense of sin and guilt. It is figuratively set forth as a wild beast (Jer 3:24), a Nessus-garment (Jer 3:25), a blight (Jer 20:18), a sin against one's own soul (Hab 2:10), and twice as the condensed symbol of Hebrew abomination--Baal (Jer 11:13 margin; Ho 9:10 margin; see ISH-BOSHETH). It is bracketed with defeat (Isa 30:3), reproach…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ Jesus ashamed of those who deny him Mr 8:38; Lu 9:26

→ Of Adam and Eve Ge 3:10

→ Destitute of, the Israelites when they worshiped the golden calf Ex 32:25

→ The unjust Zep 3:5

→ Of the cross Heb 12:2

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%shame
shame100% · 6×

6 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object50%adverbial17%predicate17%subject17%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 6 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
κρυπτόςhidden, secretἐνφανερόωI make clear, vi
μετά
ἄρχωI begin
σταυρόςa cross
ὑπομένωI remain behind,
ἑαυτοῦ
Article the
αἰσχύνη[its] shame
what comes after →
Article the
ἔσχατοςlast, at the lasγυμνότηςnakedness
μήNeg
περιπατέωI walk, conduct
αὐτός
Article the
καταφρονέωI despise, scorn
ἐν
ἀστήρa star
πλανήτηςa wanderer

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceαἰσχύνη · 6× in the New Testament
2 Corinthians Hebrews Jude Luke Philippians Revelation
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 38 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Didache The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.70c. AD 40

ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἄρξωνται καταλαμβάνειν, ἐν αἰσχύνῃ καὶ ὕβρει γίνονται, εὑρεθήσονται γὰρ εὐηθείᾳ καὶ μωρίᾳ πολλάκις χρώμενοι μᾶλλον ἢ ὑγιαινούσῃ ἐπιστήμῃ, οὐ μόνον ἐν κόροις καὶ μελαγχολίαις καὶ παραφροσύναις ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἄλλῳ βίῳ·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.201c. AD 75–95

τοῦ δὲ Λώτου παραινοῦντος σωφρονεῖν καὶ μὴ χωρεῖν ἐπʼ αἰσχύνῃ τῶν ξένων, ἀλλʼ ἔχειν αἰδῶ τῆς παρʼ αὐτῷ καταγωγῆς, εἰ δὲ ἔχουσιν ἀκρατῶς, τὰς θυγατέρας αὐτοῦ ὑπὲρ ἐκείνων ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις αὐτῶν λέγοντος παρέξειν, οὐδʼ οὕτως ἐπείσθησαν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 19.7c. AD 100

οὐκ ἔσῃ διγνώμων οὐδὲ γλωσσώδης, ὑποταγήσῃ κυρίοις ὡς τύπῳ θεοῦ ἐν αἰσχύνῃ καὶ φόβῳ: οὐ μὴ ἐπιτάξῃς δούλῳ σου ἡ παιδίσκῃ ἐν πικρίᾳ, τοῖς ἐπὶ τὸν αὐτὸν θεὸν ἐλπίζουσιν, μή ποτε οὐ μὴ φοβηθήσονται τὸν ἐπ’ ἀμφοτέροις θεόν: ὅτι οὐκ ἦλθεν κατὰ πρόσωπον…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. BC 6th c. AD

ἐν τῶι Ἀνουβιείωι πίνων. οὐκ ἔστι ἀνακύψαί με πώποτε ἐν τῇ Τρικομίαι ὑπὸ τῆς αἰσχύνης, εἰ καὶ αὑτοὺς δεδώκαμεν καὶ ἀποπεπτώκαμεν πλανώμενοι ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν καὶ πιστεύοντες τὰ ἐνύπνια.

PSI 8 889AD 501–AD 700

διὰ τὴν εὐγενεστάτην Εὐδοξίαν ἵνα επ … … … αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐπανέλυσεν μετὰ τῆς αἰσχύνης … … ων καὶ ἐγενάμην εἰς τοὺς πόδας αὐτῆς ἐν τῷ εὐλογημένῳ

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
καταφρονήσας,kataphroneō having despised, G2706 Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To think little of someone or something, like in Matthew 6:24 and Romans 2:4, where people despise or look down on others. It means to have low esteem for someone.
Amplified meaning
to think little of
Tyndale gloss
to despise
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καταφρονέω (kataphroneō) is built from the prefix κατα- (down) and φρονέω (to think). It means to despise or think little of something or someone. This term appears in several New Testament verses, including Matthew 6:24 and Romans 2:4. The lexicons generally agree on its meaning, with no significant disagreement noted.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

κατα-φρονέω, -ῶ,

[in LXX for בּגד, בּוּז, etc.;]

to think little of, despise: c. gen., Mt 6:24 18:10, Lk 16:13, Ro 2:4, I Co 11:22, I Ti 4:12 6:2, He 12:2, II Pe 2:10.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

κατα-φρονέω, -@; fut.xarahpornow; 1 aor. κατεφρόνησα; [fr. Hdt. down]; to contemn, despise, disdain, think litile or nothing of: w. gen. of the obj. [B. § 132, 15], Mt. vi. 24; xviii. 10; Lk. xvi. 13; Ro. ii. 4; 1 Co. xi. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 12; vi. 2; 2 Pet. ii. 10; Heb. xii. 2.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καταφρονέω (kataphroneō) — to despise.

καταφρον-έω,

look down upon, think slightly of, τινος [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. with accusative, regard slightly, despise, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be despised, ὑπό τινων [Refs 5th c.BC+]: future - φρονηθήσομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist -εφρονήθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. absolutely, to be disdainful, deal contemptuously, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὸ -φρονοῦν contempt, [Refs 1st c.BC+]

4. with infinitive, think contemptuously that.., presume, καταφρονήσαντες Ἀρκάδων κρέσσονες εἶναι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

5. with accusative et genitive, like{καταγιγνώσκω}, κ. τῶν Ἀθηναίων ἀδυνασίαν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καταφρονέω

kataphroneo

from 2596 and 5426; to think against, i.e. disesteem:--despise.

see GREEK for 2596

see GREEK for 5426

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καταφρονέω

v.

I despise, scorn

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καταφρονέω kataphroneō 9x

pr. to look down on; to scorn, despise, Mt. 18:10; Rom. 2:4; to slight, Mt. 6:24; Lk. 16:13; 1 Cor. 11:22; 1 Tim. 4:12; 6:2; 2 Pet. 2:10; to disregard, Heb. 12:2*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καταφρονέω fut. ήσω to think down upon, i. e. to look down upon, think slightly of, τινός Hdt., Eur., etc.

c. acc. to regard slightly, despise, Hdt., attic:—Pass. to be thought little of, despised, Xen., etc.

absol. to be disdainful, deal contemptuously, Thuc.

c. inf. to think contemptuously that, to presume, καταφρονήσαντες κρέσσονες εἶναι Hdt.; καταφρονοῦντες κἂν προαισθέσθαι Thuc.

c. acc. rei, only in ionic writers (cf. κατανοέω), to fix one's thoughts upon, aim at, Lat. affectare, τὴν τυραννίδα Hdt.: also to observe with contempt, τι id. Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAP-NSM — Verb · aorist · active · participle · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAP-NSM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
22%he will despise
he will despise22% · 2×despise you11% · 1×do you despise11% · 1×should despise11% · 1×they should despise11% · 1×having despised11% · 1×despising11% · 1×may you despise11% · 1×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἕτεροςanother, different
Article the
μήNeg
ὁράωI see, look uponδεσπότηςa lord, master,
μακροθυμίαpatience, forbearanc
Article the
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
νεότηςyouth, youthfulness
Article the
καταφρονέωhaving despised,
what comes after →
οὐNeg
δύναμαιI am powerful, a
εἷςone
Article the
ἀγνοέωI do not know, am ig
ὅτιthat, since, bec
καίand, even, also, nam
καταισχύνωI shame, disgrac
ἀλλάbut, except
τύποςa figure, model,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαταφρονέω · 9× in the New Testament
1 Timothy Matthew 1 Corinthians 2 Peter Hebrews Luke Romans
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaEvery Good Man is Free 103c. AD 40

Συλεῖ δὲ ἀφικομένῳ καὶ δυσανασχετοῦντι ἐπί τε τῇ βλάβῃ καὶ τῇ τοῦ θεράποντος ῥᾳθυμίᾳ καὶ τῇ περιττῇ καταφρονήσει μηδὲν μήτε τῆς χρόας μήτε ὧν ἔπραττε μεταβαλὼν εὐτολμότατά φησι·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.313c. AD 75–95

ὄναρ δὲ ὁ θεὸς ἐπιστὰς αὐτῷ παρῄνεσε λαβόντι τὸν γαμβρὸν καὶ τὰς θυγατέρας ἠρεμεῖν καὶ μηδὲν εἰς αὐτοὺς ὑπὸ θυμοῦ τολμᾶν, σπονδὰς δὲ ποιεῖσθαι πρὸς Ἰάκωβον, αὐτὸς λέγων ἐκείνῳ συμμαχήσειν, εἰ καταφρονήσας αὐτοῦ τῆς ὀλιγότητος χωρήσειεν αὐτῷ διὰ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Ross.Georg. 2 20Arsinoites (?)AD 146

τῷ αὐτῷ ὑπομνηματογράφῳ … ὃς ἐκέλευσεν τοῖς περὶ αὐτὸν ὑπηρέταις … ἐπειδὴ ὁ Ἑρμίας καταφρονήσας τῶν κριθέντων α … … ἐποίησε, μὴ ἀρκεσθεὶς δὲ ἐπὶ τούτοις … οὐ τὰς

P.Mert. 3 112AD 101–AD 200

δεῖ … … … τὴν τιμήν μοι αὐτῶν· γράψον δέ μοι … σπουδῆς σου. καταφρονήσας μου γράψαι ἠμέλησας, τοῦτο δὲ δεύτερον … … ἄδελφε, σαπρῶς ποιεῖς γράφων πρὸς τὴν

SB 18 13733Narmuthis (Arsinoites)AD 195

καὶ δοῦναί μοι τὸ σύνβολον καὶ κωμίσασθαι τὰ τῆς παραθέσεως γράμματα καὶ τῶι Φαμενὼτ καταφρονήσας μου ἀπῄτησεν καὶ ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐπεκράτει ὁ προφήτης Demotic ἀπογράψασθαι

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
ἐνen at G1722 Preposition
2,743× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word is a preposition that means in, on, or among something. It's used in many places, like Matthew 7:3 and Luke 7:37, to describe a location or relationship. It can also mean by, with, or during.
Tyndale gloss
in/on/among
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The most frequent preposition in the New Testament, 2,752 occurrences. In, on, at, among, within — its force comes almost entirely from the word it is attached to. What it does here is put the events inside a community rather than at a distance: they were fulfilled among us.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐν,

prep, (the most freq. of all in NT), c. dat. (= Heb. בְּ, Lat. in, c. abl.).

Of place, c. dat. rei, pers., in, within, on, at, by, among: ἐν τ. πόλει, Lk 7:37; τ. οφθαλμῷ, Mt 7:3; τ. κοιλίᾳ, Mt 12:40; τ. ὄρει, II Pe 1:18; τ. θρόνῳ, Re 3:21; τ. δεξιᾷ τ. θεοῦ, Ro 8:34; ἐν ἡμῖν , Lk 1:1; of books, ἐν τ. βιβλίῳ, Ga 3:10; τ. νόμῳ, Mt 12:5, al.; ἐν τοῖς τ. Πατρός, in my Father's house (RV; cf. M, Pr., 103)…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐν κυρίῳ, (οἴ. Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. ii. p. 82 544.; W. 389 (364); Weiss, Bibl. Theol. des N. T. §§ 84 b., 149 c.), ingrafied as it were in Christ, in fellowship and union with Christ, with the Lord: Ro. iii. 24; vi. 11, 23; viii. 39; 1Co.i.4; 2 Co. iii. 14; Gal. ii. 4; iii. 14, 26, 28; v. 6; Eph.i. 3 [Rec. om. ἐν]; ii. 6 sq. 10,13; 1 Tim.i.14; 2 Tim.i. 1,13; ii-1; 1 Pet. iii. 16; v.10; στήκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, Phil. iv. 1; iva εὑρεθῶ ἐν αὐτῷ, that I may be found (by God and Christ) most intimately united to him, Phil. iii. 9; εἶναι ἐν Χριστῷ "Inc. 1 Co. i. 30; οἱ ἐν Xp. "Ina. Ro. viii. 1; 1 Pet. v. 14; κοιμᾶσθαι ἐν Χριστῷ, θνήσκειν ἐν κυρίῳ, to fall asleep, to die, mindful of relationship to Christ and confiding in it [W. u.s.], 1 Co. xv. 18; Rey. xiv. 13. Since such union with Christ is the basis on which actions and virtues rest, the expression is…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐν 210 contract—time of Augustus) ἱμάτια γυναικεῖα ἐν apyv(plov) δραχμαῖς ἑκατόν, P Oxy IV. 7247 (A.D. 155) ἐξ ὧν ἔσχες τὴν πρώτην δόσιν ἐν δραχμαῖς τεσσαράκοντα, 70. I. 565 (A.D. 211) δανειζομένη. .. ἀργύριον ἔντοκον ἐν δραχμαῖς ἑξακισχειλίαις, and P Grenf II. 778 (iii/iv a.p.) (=Selections, Pp. 120) το]ὺς μισθοὺς. . ὄντας ἐν δραχμαῖς τριακοσίαις τεσσαράκοντα. Similar are P Oxy IV. 7084 (a.p. 188) yopou . . ἐν (1vpod)(apraBats) ’B, BGU 1. 724 (a.p. 191) ἐξέκοψαν πλεῖστον τόπον ἐν ἀρούραις πέντε: with which may be compared Eph 2!° τὸν νόμον τῶν ἐντολῶν ἐν δόγμασιν, “consisting in.” In P Lond 9215 (ii/iii a.p.) (ΞΞ 111. P- 134) γεγονέναι ἐν ἀμπέλῳ = ‘to be planted with vines.” A predicative use of ἐν is seen in P Hib I. 421° (B.c. 262) δώσομεν Λευκίωι ἐν ὀφειλήματι, ‘asa debt,” P Petr I. 1215 (cf. II. p. 22) ὅσα δὲ ᾿Αξιοθέα προσενήνεγκται ἐμ φερνῆι, “ἐᾷς dowry,” and P Tebt I. 120 135…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐν (en) — in/on/among.

ἐν,

poetry ἐνί, εἰν, εἰνί [Refs 8th c.BC+], forms used by Epic dialect and Lyric Poets as the metre requires, but only as falsa lectio in Trag., εἰν [Refs 5th c.BC+] ἰν [Refs]

__PREP. WITH DAT. AND ACC. Radical sense, in, into.

__A WITH DAT.

__A.I OF PLACE,

__A.I.1 in, νήσῳ ἐν ἀμφιρύτῃ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; with names of cities or islands, as ἐν Ἀθήνῃς, ἐν Τροίῃ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; where ἐν is used, it = in the district of.., ὲν Ἐλευσῖνι [Refs] in my arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐν αὑτῷ εἶναι to be in one's senses, be oneself, ἔτ᾽ ἐν σαυτῷ (variant -τοῦ) γενοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.I.1.b ἐν τοῖς ἰχθύσιν in the fish-market, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so ἐν τοῖν δυοῖν ὀβολοῖν ἐθεώρουν ἄν in the two-obol seats, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐν

en

a primary preposition denoting (fixed) position (in place, time or

state), and (by implication) instrumentality (medially or

constructively), i.e. a relation of rest (intermediate between 1519

and 1537); "in," at, (up-)on, by, etc.:--about, after, against, +

almost, X altogether, among, X as, at, before, between, (here-)by (+

all means), for (... sake of), + give self wholly to, (here-)in(-to,

-wardly), X mightily, (because) of, (up-)on, (open-)ly, X outwardly,

one, X quickly,

X shortly, (speedi-)ly, X that, X there(-in, -on),

through(-out), (un-)to(-ward), under, when, where(-with), while,

with(-in). Often used in compounds, with substantially the same

import; rarely with verbs of motion, and then not to indicate

direction, except (elliptically) by a separate (and different)

preposition.

see GREEK for 1519

see GREEK for 1537

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐν

Prep.

in, on, among

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐν en 2x

followed by the dat., in, Mt. 8:6; Mk. 12:26; Rev. 6:6,; upon, Lk. 8:32; among, Mt. 11:11; before, in the presence of, Mk. 8:38; in the sight, estimation of, 1 Cor. 14:11; before, judicially, 1 Cor. 6:2; in, of state, occupation, habit, Mt. 21:22; Lk. 7:25; Rom. 4:10; in the case of, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐν

e)nprepe)ni/prep ei)nprep ei)ni/prep in, among. c. dat.

Lat. in.

PREP. WITH DAT.:

OF PLACE

in, ἐν νήσῳ, ἐν Τροίῃ, etc., Hom., etc.:—elliptic, ἐν Ἀλκινόοιο (sc. οἴκῳ) Od.; εἰν Ἀΐδαο Il.; ἐν παιδοτρίβου at the school of the training master, Ar.

in, upon, ἐν οὔρεσι Hom., etc.

in the number of, amongst, ἐν Δαναοῖς, etc., Hom.; and with Verbs of ruling, ἄρχειν, ἀνάσσειν ἐν πολλοῖς to be first or lord among many, i. e. over them, id. Hom.; cf. ὁ, τό B. III. 3.

in one's hands, within one's reach or power, Lat. penes, Hom., etc.; ἐν σοὶ γάρ ἐσμεν Soph.; ἐν τῷ θεῷ τὸ τέλος ἦν Dem.

in respect of, ἐν γήρᾳ in point of age, Soph.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%in
in79% · 2226×with5% · 135×among5% · 132×by4% · 112×on3% · 72×other renderings4% · 116×other renderings1% · 40×

2,833 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 36 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%predicate11%object3%subject3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,743 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,πᾶςall, the whole, σύ
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύεἰμίI am, exist
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the othe
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
ἐγώ
μετάπατήρfather, Father, εἰς
ἐνat2743×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaἡμέραa dayκαρδίαthe heart, inner
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,Article theμένωI remain, abide
σύ
εἰμίI am, existμένωI remain, abideκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, existArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theτόποςa placeσοφίαwisdom

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐν · 2,743× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Acts John Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Revelation Mark Ephesians Colossians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
δεξιᾷdexios right hand G1188 Adjective · dative · singular · feminine
54× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Means the right side or hand, often used in the Bible to describe something done with the right hand, like in Matthew 5:29 and John 18:10.
Amplified meaning
the place of honor
Tyndale gloss
right
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δεξιός (i.e., *dexios*) means 'right' and is used to denote the right hand or side, contrasting with the left (ἀριστερός). It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, such as referring to the right hand of God (Acts 2:33) and positions of honor (Matthew 20:21). The lexicons also note its metaphorical uses, including meanings related to skill and fortune.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δεξιός, -ά, -όν

[in LXX chiefly for יָמִין ;]

the right: Mt 5:29, Jo 18:10, al.; ὅπλα δ., weapons carried in the right hand, i.e. for offence, II Co 6:7 ; ἡ δ. χείρ, Mt 5:30, Lk 6:6, al.; ἡ δ. (sc. χείρ), Mt 6:3, al.; ἐπὶ τὴν δ., in the right hand (R, txt., on R, mg.), Re 5:1; διδόναι τὴν δ., in friend­ship (Deiss., BS, 251), Ga 2:9; metaph. of power, τῇ δ. αὐτοῦ, Ac 2:33 5:31; τὰ δ., the right side, Mk…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δεξιός, -c, -dv, (fr. δέχομαι, fut. δέξομαι, or fr. δέκω, which is akin to deixvyse; prop. of that hand which is wont to take hold of as well as to point out; just as ἄξιος comes fr. ἄξω, fut. of ἄγω ; [cf. Curtius §§ 11, 266]), the right: Mt. ν. 29, 39; Lk. xxii. 50; Jn. xviii. 10; Rev. x. 2; ἡ δεξιὰ χείρ, Mt. v. 30; Lk. vi. 6; Acts iii. 7; Rev. i. 16; xiii. 16; and (with χείρ omitted) ἡ δεξιά (like ἡ ἀριστερά), Mt. vi. 3; xxvii. 29; Rev. i. 20; 11. 1; ν. 7; ἐπὶ τὴν δεξιάν [on the right hand i. 6.1 at the right side, Rev. y. 1 [but al. take it more closely, in the right hand; cf. vs. 7 and xx. 1]; διδόναι τὴν δεξιάν or τὰς δεξιάς, to pledge either a mutual friendship, or a compact, by joining the right hands: Gal. ii. 9 (1 Mace. vi. 58; xi. 50, 62, 66; xiii. 50; 2 Mace. xi. 26; xii. 11; xiii. 22; ef. Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. pp. 566 and 599; and in prof. auth. as Xen. an. 1, 6, 6; 2,5…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

δεξιός. P Magd 245 (B.C. 217) Ψενοβάστις τῆι αὐτῆι δεξιᾶι χειρὶ ἐπισπασαμένη τῆς ἀ[ναβολῆς τοῦ ἱματίου ---α5 completed by Wilcken Archiv vi. p. 274. P Tebt I. 39% (B.c. 114) ἐτραυματίσαν τὴν γυναῖκά μου εἰς τὴν δεξιὰν χεῖρα, P Oxy X. 1252 vwersoii19 (Α. Ὁ. 288-05) ἐγὼ . . . χειροτονη[θεὶς διὰ] τῆς εὐτυχοῦς σου δεξιᾶς, “1 having been appointed by your propitious right hand” (Edd.). For δεξιά = ““ pledge” see P Fay 124} (ii/A.D.) πάνυ yap μοι δοκεῖς ἄφρων tis εἶν]αι... μὴ φυλάσστι]ν σου τὴν δεξιάν, “‘indeed you appear to me to be quite mad in not keeping your pledge ” (Edd.). Cf. P Leid Z* (a.p. 391-2) εἴωθεν ἡ ὑμετέρα φ[ιλ]ανθρωπία πᾶσιν τοῖς δεομένοις χεῖρ[α] δεξιὰν [dpe] yerv. So P Oxy IIT. 53318 (ii/iii a.p.) ἵνα τηρήσωσι αὐτῶν τὴν δεξιάν. For the phrase of Mt 207! etc. cf. P kyl IT. 154% (A.D. 66) οὐλ(ὴ) μετώπωι ἐγ δεξιῶν, P Tebt II. 373% (a.p. 110-1 οὐλὴ στέρ[ν]ῳι ἐγ δεξιῶν. A…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δεξιός (dexios) — right.

δεξιός, ά, όν,

on the right hand or side, opposed to ἀριστερός, δ. μαζός, γλουτός, ὦμος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὸ δ. (i.e. κέρας) the right of an army, [Refs 5th c.BC+] on or to the right, νωμῆσαι βῶν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπὶ δεξιόφιν (Epic dialect genitive) towards the right, [NT+8th c.BC+]; δεξιά as adverb, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]

II. fortunate, especially of the flight of birds and other omens, δ. ὄρνις [Refs 8th c.BC+]. adverb -ῶς[Refs 2nd c.AD+]

III. Astron., northerly, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

IV. metaphorically, dexterous, ready, skilful, clever, [Refs 5th c.BC+]a clever thing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]. adverb -ιῶς[Refs 4th c.BC+]in the right spirit, [Refs 1st c.BC+] O.: superlative δεξιώτατα [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

δεξιός

dexios

from 1209; the right side or (feminine) hand (as that which usually

takes):--right (hand, side).

see GREEK for 1209

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δεξιός, ά, όν

Adj

on the right hand, right hand, right

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δεξιός dexios 54x

right, as opposed to left, Mt. 5:29, 30; Lk. 6:6; ἡ δεξιά, i.e. χείρ, the right hand, Mt. 6:3; 27:29; τὰ δεξιά, i.e. μέρη, the parts towards the right hand, the right hand side; καθίζειν, or, καθῆσθαι, or, ἑστάναι, ἐκ δεξιῶν [μερῶν] τινος, to sit or stand at the right hand of any one, as a mark of the highest honor and dignity which he can bestow, Mt. 20:20; 26:64; εἶνι ἐκ δεξιῶν [μερῶν] τινος, to be at one’s right hand, as a helper, Acts 2:25; δεξιὰς (χεῖρας) διδόναι, to give the right hand to any one, as a pledge of sincerity in one’s promises, Gal.…

Read the full entry →
Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δεξιός δέχομαι on the right hand or side, Lat. dexter, opp. to ἀριστερός, Hom., etc.; τὸ δ. (sc. κέρας) the right of an army, Xen.:—adverb. usages, ἐπὶ δεξιά on the right, Il.; ἐπὶ δεξιόφιν (epic gen.) towards the right, id. Il.; πρὸς δεξιά Hdt.

fortunate, boding good, of the flight of birds, δεξιὸς ὄρνις, ῀ αἴσιος, Hom. —This sense came from the Greek augurs looking to the North, so that lucky omens, which came from the East, were on the right, while the unlucky ones from the West were on the left.

metaph. dexterous, ready, opp. to σκαιός (sinister, French gauche); and of the mind, sharp, shrewd, clever, Ar., Thuc., etc.:—adv., δεξιῶς; Sup. δεξιώτατα, Ar.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-DSF — Adjective · dative · singular · feminine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-DSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Dative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

The most efficient member of the body, Mt 5:30, and the ready executor of the behests of the will. Hence its use as a symbol of many of the strongest emotions of the inner man. The right-hand is significant of power, especially the almighty power of God, Ex 15:6 Ps 21:8 77:10; of honor, Ps 45:9 Mt 25:34 Ac 7:55; of special benediction, Ge 48:14; of fraternal love, Ga 2:9; of hostility, Ps 109:6

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
63%right hand
right hand63% · 34×right35% · 19×other renderings2% · 1×

54 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial74%object11%subject7%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 54 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
αὐτόςἐνεἰς
ἐκ
κάθημαιI sit, am seatedεἷςoneκαθίζωI set, make to s
ἐν
καθίζωI set, make to sεἰμίI am, existκαταφρονέωI despise, scorn
εἰμίI am, exist
στῦλοςa pillar
δεξιόςright hand54×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godδύναμιςmight, power, maκάθημαιI sit, am seated
ἐγώ
ἕωςuntil, as far asκαίand, even, also,Disj
αὐτός
Article theδεῦτεcome hither, comκαίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
εἷςoneἀριστερόςon the left hand
σύ
χείρa hand

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδεξιός · 54× in the New Testament
Matthew Revelation Acts Mark Luke Hebrews John 1 Peter 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians Galatians
Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 93 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 122c. AD 40

ἀλλὰ γὰρ καὶ κινήσεις ἑπτὰ εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὴν ἄνω, τὴν κάτω, τὴν ἐπὶ δεξιά, τὴν ἐπ’ εὐώνυμα, τὴν πρόσω, τὴν κατόπιν, τὴν ἐν κύκλῳ, ἃς ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα τρανοῦσιν οἱ τὴν ὄρχησιν ἐπιδεικνύμενοι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 2.80c. AD 75–95

Ὁ δὲ τῆς δεξιᾶς αὐτοῦ λαβόμενος ὦ νεανία, φησί, σὺ γάρ μοι νῦν ἄριστος καὶ συνίσειν ἱκανώτατος ὑπὸ οἰκέτου τοὐμοῦ μεμαρτύρησαι, τῶν αὐτῶν ἀγαθῶν, ὧν καὶ τούτῳ μετέδωκας ἀξίωσον κἀμὲ φράσας ὅσα μοι κατὰ τοὺς ὕπνους ὀνειράτων ὄψεις προδηλοῦσι·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 11.10c. AD 100

Καὶ ἦν ποταμὸς ἕλκων ἐκ δεξιῶν, καὶ ἀνέβαινεν ἐξ αὐτοῦ δένδρα ὡραῖα: καὶ ὃς ἂν φάγῃ ἐξ αὐτῶν, ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Athen.. 23Theadelphia (Arsinoites)AD 82

καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης. ὑπογραφεὺς τῶν ὁμολογούντων Φρόντων Πάπου ὡς ἐτῶν μ οὐλὴ τραχήλῳ ἐκ δεξιῶν Δῖος καὶ Ὦσις καὶ Ἡρακλῆς οἱ τρεῖς Ἡρακλέους Πέρσαι τῆς ἐπιγονῆς ἀλλήλων ἔγγυοι εἰς

P.Alex. 7Dionysias (Arsinoites)AD 113

ἐνγύοις μετὰ κυρίου τῆς Δημητροῦτος … … ειδωνος ὡς ἐτῶν εἴκοσι πέντε οὐλὴ χειρὶ δεξιᾷ εἰς ἔκτισιν ἀργυρίου ἐπισήμου νομίσματος κεφαλαίου δραχμὰς ἕκατον εἴκοσι τέσσαρας ἃς καὶ εἴληφαν παρʼ

P.Amh. 2 112Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 128

μετώπῳ ἐξ ἀριστερῶν τοῦ δὲ ἄλλου Πανεφρίμις Στοτοήτεως ὡς ἐτῶν … οὐλὴ … ψι δεξιᾷ … … … Πακῦσις Στοτοήτεως ὁμολογῶ ἀπέχειν παρὰ σοῦ ἀδελφοῦ Πανεφρίμιος τὰς προκιμένας ἀργυρίου

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
τεte and G5037 Particle
209× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A conjunction meaning and or both, used to connect words or ideas closely. Found in Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33, it shows a strong link between things.
Tyndale gloss
and/both
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word τέ (te) is an enclitic copulative particle that functions similarly to the Latin '-que' and is used to denote a closer connection than the more general καί (kai). It appears primarily in the New Testament, especially in the book of Acts, and can mean 'and,' 'both,' or 'also.' Notably, it is used in verses like Matthew 28:12 and Acts 2:33.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τέ, enclitic copulative particle (= Lat. -que as καί = et, ac, atque), not very freq. in NT, more than two-thirds of the occurrences being in Ac.

τέ solitarium, and, denoting a closer affinity than καί between words and sentences which it connects (Bl., §77, 8): Mt 28:12, Jo 4:42, Ac 2:33, 37, 40 10:22 11:21, al.

Denoting a closer connection than simple καί, τὲ . . . καί, τὲ καί, τὲ . . . τέ (Ac 26:16 Ro 14:8), as well . . . as also, both . . . and: Lk 12:45, Ac 1:1 15:9 21:30, al.; τὲ . . . δέ, and . . . and, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τέ, (as δέ comes fr. δή, μέν fr. μήν, so τέ fr. the adv. TH, prop. as; [al. ally it with καί, ef. Curtius $§ 27, 647; Vaniéek p. 95; Fick Pt. i. 32; Donaldson, New Crat. § 195]), a copulative enclitie particle (on the use of which ef. Hermann ad Vig. p. 833; Klotz ad Devar. II. 2 p. 739 sqq.); in the N. T. it occurs most frequently in the Acts, then in the Ep. to the Heb., somewhat rarely in the other bks. (in Mt. three or four times, in Mk. once, viz. xv. 36 RG; in John’s Gospel three times; nowhere in the Epp. to the Gal., Thess., or Col., nor in the Epistles of John and Peter; twice in text. Rec. of Rev., viz. i. 2; xxi. 12); and, Lat. que, differing from the particle καί in that the latter is conjunctive, τέ adjunctive [W. § 53, 2; ace. to Baéumlein (Griech. Partikeln, p. 145), καί introduces something new under the same aspect yet as an external addition, whereas τέ marks it as…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τε (te) — and/both.

τε,

enclitic Particle, with two main uses (see. infr. A, B).

__A as a Conjunction,

__A.I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second, ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usually short in [Refs 8th c.BC+], longer in later Gr., e.g. ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ᾽ ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ᾽ ἀδικήσαντες κατ᾽ ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen.[Refs 3rd c.BC+]; κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι [Refs 2nd c.AD+], compare 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (which see); τε may be used three or more times…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τέ

te

a primary particle (enclitic) of connection or addition; both or also

(properly, as correlation of 2532):--also, and, both, even, then,

whether. Often used in composition, usually as the latter participle.

see GREEK for 2532

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τέ

Disj.prt.

and, both

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τε te 215x

enclitic, can function as a conj., serving either as a lightly-appending link, Acts 1:15; and, Acts 2:3; or as an inclusive prefix, Lk. 12:45; both, Lk. 24:20; Acts 26:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle — Particle
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT PaRTicle, disjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
37%then
then37% · 84×both35% · 79×and14% · 32×also11% · 26×other renderings3% · 6×

227 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject20%adverbial19%object13%indirect object3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 209 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀνευρίσκωI find by seekinδιαγογγύζωI murmur greatlyφίλος
ἸουδαῖοςJewish
πιστεύωI believe, have κύριοςlord, Lord, mastπᾶςall, the whole,
λέγωI say, speak
καρδίαthe heart, innerφυλακήa watching, guarθεόςGod, a god
πολύςmuch, many, often
σφόδραexceedingly, greἹεροσόλυμαJerusalemαὐτός
ἐν
ἐγώμάρτυςa witnessποιέωI do, make
τέand209×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Ἕλληνa Hellene, a Greγυνήa woman, wife, mArticle the
Article the
ΠαῦλοςPaulχώραregion, land, fiπόλιςa city
αὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakπεριαστράπτωI flash around l
πρός
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
γάρfor
θῆλυςfemaleἐπιθυμίαdesire, eagernesζάωI live

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτέ · 209× in the New Testament
Acts Hebrews Romans Luke 1 Corinthians John Matthew 2 Corinthians James Ephesians Jude Philippians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
τοῦho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
of the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
θρόνουthronos throne G2362 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
62× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A throne refers to a seat of power or authority, often used to describe God's power or a king's rule, as seen in Matthew 5:34 and Revelation 1:4.
Amplified meaning
a seat of power
Tyndale gloss
throne
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word θρόνος (transliterated as thronos) means 'throne' or 'seat' and is derived from the verb meaning 'to sit.' It encompasses a range of meanings from a literal chair or seat of authority to metaphorical uses representing power, such as God's sovereignty or kingly rule. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts referring to divine authority, Christ's reign, and even the thrones of angels.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θρόνος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX chiefly for כִּסֵּא, Ex 11:5, al.;]

in Hom., a seat, chair. Later, a throne, chair of state, seat of authority; of kings: metaph., of God, Mt 5:34, Ac 7:49(LXX), Re 1:4, al.; by meton., for kingly power, sovereignty, Lk 1:32, 52, Ac 2:30; for an angelic hierarchy, Col 1:16; of Christ, Mt 19:28, Re 3:21, al.; of Satan, Re…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θρόνος, του, ὁ, (OPA to sit; ef. Curtius § 316), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for 8D3, a throne, seat, i.e. a chair of state having a footstool ; assigned in the N. T. to kings, hence by meton. for kingly power, royalty: Lk. i. 32,52; Acts ii. 30. metaph. to God, the governor of the world: Mt. ν. 34; xxiii. 22; Acts vii. 49 (Is. Ixvi.1); Rev. i. 4; iii. 21; iv. 2-6, 9, 10, ete.; Heb. iv. 16; viii. 1; xii. 2, to the Messiah, the partner and assistant in the divine administration: Mt. xix. 28; xxv. 31; Rev. iii. 21; xx. 11; xxii. 3; hence the divine power belonging to Christ, Heb. i. 8. to judges, i. q. tribunal or bench (Plut. mor. p- 807 b.): Mt. xix. 28; Lk. xxii. 30; Rev. xx. 4. to elders: Rev.iv.4; xi. 16. toSatan: Rev. ii. 13; ef. Bleek ad loc. to the beast (concerning which see θηρίον) : Rev. xvi. 10. θρόνος is used by meton. of one who holds dominion or exercises authority ; thus in…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θρόνος. For this word, which in the NT, and notably in the Apocalypse, is always an official seat or chair of state, we may compare OG/S 383” (rescript of Commagene — mid. i/B.c.) ἐγὼ πατρώιαν [ἀ]ρχὴν [π]αρ[αλ]α[ β]ὼν βασιλείαν [μ]ὲν ἐμο[ἴ]ς ὑπήκοον θρόνοις, 7d. 4? πρὸς οὐρανίους Διὸς ᾿Ωρομάσδου θρόνους, and Preisigke 9827 (B.C. 4) ὑπὲρ Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος θεοῦ υἱοῦ Σεβαστοῦ . . . τίδ]ν θρόνον καὶ τὸν βωμὸν ἀνέθηκε, 23. ττ645 (B.C. 181-..5) ὑπὲρ βασιλἕως Πτολεμαίο(υ) καὶ βασιλίσσης Κλεοπάτρας . . - τὸ Πτολεμαῖον καὶ τὸν θρόνον Ἕ!ρμεῖ Ἡρακλεῖ. In connexion with the above it may be noticed that Deissmann (1.4.2, | 2 τ = J 2 Ἄ. « ΄ Prete gon (nev) 200) where an inser. on a temple-pillar | Ρ- 280 n.2) from personal observation thinks that ὃ θρόνος is dated—éml Διδύμου ἱερέως θρησκεύοντος. Boisacq (Ρ. 340) τοῦ Σατανᾶ (Rev 213) at Pergamum can only have been the altar of Zeus, which there…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θρόνος (thronos) — throne.

θρόνος, ὁ,

seat, chair, [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. throne, chair of state, θ. βασιλήϊος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; king's estate or dignity, σκῆπτρα καὶ θρόνους [Refs 5th c.BC+]; in the Prytaneum, τῷ [Ἀπόλλωνι] θ. ἐξελεῖν [Refs]

3. oracular seat of Apollo, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; μαντικοὶ θ. [Refs 4th c.BC+]

4. chair of a teacher, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

5. judge's bench, [Refs 1st c.AD+]

6. Astrology texts,= ὕψωμα, [Refs]

6. b favourable combination of planetary positions, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. a kind of bread, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]

III. name of a lozenge, [Refs 7th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

θρόνος

thronos

from thrao (to sit); a stately seat ("throne"); by implication, power

or (concretely) a potentate:--seat, throne.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θρόνος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a throne, seat

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θρόνος thronos 62x

a seat, a throne, Mt. 5:34; 19:28; Lk. 1:52; meton. power, dominion, Lk. 1:32; Heb. 1:8; a potentate, Col. 1:16

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θρόνος θρόνος, ὁ, *θράω a seat, chair, Hom.: a throne, chair of state, Hdt., attic:—in pl. also, the throne, i. e. the king's estate or dignity, Soph.

the oracular seat of Apollo or the Pythia, Aesch., etc.

the chair of a teacher, Lat. cathedra, Plat.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

thron. (kicce', a "seat" in 2Ki 4:10; a "royal seat" in Jon 3:6; thronos): Usually the symbol of kingly power and dignity. Solomon's throne was noted for its splendor and magnificence (1Ki 10:18-20; compare 2Ch 9:17-19). It symbolizes:

(1) The exalted position of earthly kings, rulers, judges, etc., their majesty and power (of kings: Ge 41:40; 1Ki 2:19; Job 36:7, etc.; denoting governing or judicial power: 2Sa 14:9;

Throne

(Heb. kiss’e), a royal chair or seat of dignity (Deut. 17:18; 2 Sam. 7:13; Ps. 45:6); an elevated seat with a canopy and hangings, which cover it. It denotes the seat of the high priest in 1 Sam. 1:9; 4:13, and of a provincial governor in Neh. 3:7 and Ps. 122:5. The throne of Solomon is described at length in 1 Kings 10:18-20.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The Hebrew word so translated applies to any elevated seat occupied by a person in authority, whether a high priest, (1 Samuel 1:9) a judge, (Psalms 122:5) or a military chief (Jeremiah 1:16) The use of a chair in a country where the usual postures were squatting and reclining was at all times regarded as a symbol of dignity. (2 Kings 4:10; Proverbs 9:14) In order to specify a throne in our sense of the term, it was necessary to add to the word the notion of royalty; hence the frequent occurrence of such expressions as "throne of the kingdom." (17:18; 1 Kings 1:46;

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

An established emblem of kingly dignity and power, used by sovereigns on all stale occasions. That of Solomon was of ivory, overlaid with gold; having six broad steps, every one guarded by a golden lion at each end, 1Ki 10:18-20. Heaven is called God’s throne, and the earth his footstool, Isa 66:1. His throne is also sublimely described as everlasting, and as built upon justice and equity, Ps 45:6; 97:2. See also Isa 6:2-4; Eze 1:1- 28. Christ is on the throne forever, as the King of heaven, Ps 110:1; He 1:8;

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
88%throne
throne88% · 56×thrones13% · 8×

64 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial68%predicate13%subject13%object7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 62 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐπίἐνώπιονbefore the face ἐν
ἐπί
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of thκαθίζωI set, make to sκάθημαιI sit, am seated
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
καίand, even, also,
ὅτιthat, since, because
οὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
δώδεκαIndec
ἐπί
θρόνοςthrone62×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theἐνώπιονbefore the face ὑψόωI lift up, exalt
Article the
θεόςGod, a godδώδεκαIndecδέbut, on the othe
αὐτός
πίπτωI fall, fall undκαίand, even, also,
λέγωI say, speak
γίνομαιI come into beinἀμήνHebrὁράωI see, look upon
δόξαhonor, renown, glory
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθρόνος · 62× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew Hebrews Luke Acts Colossians
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 59 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Clement of Rome Philo of Alexandria Polycarp The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Preliminary Studies 118c. AD 40

πάλιν γε μὴν Αἴγυπτον ἀφηνιάσασαν, ἡνίκα τὸν ἀντίθεον ἀπεσέμνυνε νοῦν τὰ παράσημα τῆς βασιλείας ἀναδοῦσα αὐτῷ, τὸν θρόνον, τὸ σκῆπτρον, τὸ διάδημα, δέκα πληγαῖς καὶ τιμωρίαις ὁ τῶν ὅλων ἐπίτροπος καὶ κηδεμὼν νουθετεῖ.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.137c. AD 75–95

τῷ δὲ ἐπιθέματι αὐτῆς ἦσαν πρόστυποι δύο, Χερουβεῖς μὲν αὐτοὺς Ἑβραῖοι καλοῦσι, ζῷα δέ ἐστι πετεινὰ μορφὴν δʼ οὐδενὶ τῶν ὑπʼ ἀνθρώπων ἑωραμένων παραπλήσια, Μωυσῆς δέ φησι τῷ θρόνῳ τοῦ θεοῦ προστυπεῖς ἑωρακέναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 16.2c. AD 100

λέγει κύριος: Ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου: ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι, ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD undated
P.Oxy. 7 1050OxyrhynchosAD 101–AD 300

1 λόγος δραχμῶν υ. ἱερεῦσι δραχμαὶ ξ, Νείλῳ δραχμαὶ κ, θρόνῳ δραχμαὶ κ, ἱπποκόμοις δραχμαὶ … , κήρυκι … ξυστάρχῃ … Ὡρείωνι … Σεουήρῳ

P.Oxy. 54 3756OxyrhynchosAD 325

αὐτοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν κατεστάθην ἐγὼ κατὰ πρόσταγμα τοῦ κυρίου μου Ἰσιδώρου τοῦ διακοσμήσαντος τὸν θρόνον τῆς ἡγεμονίας τῆς αὐτῆς Ἀλεξανδρίας ἐπίτροπος τῇ παιδὶ ἀκολούθως τοῖς περὶ τούτου γενομένοις ὑπομνήμασι

P.Cair. Masp. 1 67006 VoAntinoopolis (?)AD 566–AD 570

καὶ ειτα … ν κοῦφον καὶ … δρον καὶ τοῦ κύκλου δερματίνου αὐτοῦ, καὶ θρόνος εἷς , καὶ φρινειν καὶ γλωσσοκομεῖον ἓν ξύλινα, καὶ ἑπτὰ κειπλαρια· ὧν ἓν καὶ

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
τοῦho <the> G3588 Article · genitive · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSM — Article · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
<the>19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
θεοῦtheos of God G2316 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
1,311× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Hebrews as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word simply means God, referring to the one true deity. It is used throughout the New Testament, including in Matthew 27:46 and Acts 14:11, to describe the supreme being and creator of the universe.
Amplified meaning
the Supreme Being, the Creator
Tyndale gloss
God
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

θεός (theos) means 'God' or 'a god' and is used in both singular and plural forms. It refers to the supreme deity in monotheistic contexts, as well as to lesser deities in polytheistic settings. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in verses like Matthew 27:46 and Acts 19:37. Some lexicons note its use as a title for rulers or magistrates, reflecting its broader application in ancient texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

θεός, -οῦ, ὁ, ἡ (Ac 19:37 only; v. M, Pr., 60, 244), late voc., θεέ (Mt 27:46; cf. De 3:24, al.),

[in LXX chiefly for אֱלֹהִים, also for אֵל and other cognate forms, יהוה, etc.;]

a god or deity, God.

In polytheistic sense, a god or deity: Ac 28:6, I Co 8:4, II Th 2:4, al.; pl., Ac. 14:11 19:26, Ga 4:8, al.

Of the one true God;

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

θεός, -οὔ, ὁ and ἡ, voc. θεέ, once in the N. T., Mt. xxvii. 46; besides in Deut. iii. 24; Judg. [xvi. 28;] xxi. 3; [2 S. vii. 25; Is. xxxviii. 20]; Sir. xxiii. 4; Sap. ix. 1; 3 Mace. vi. 3; 4 Mace. vi. 27; Act. Thom. 44 sq. 57; Eus. h. 6. 2, 23,16; [5, 20,7; vit. Const. 2,55, 1.59]; ef. W. §8, 2 ο.; [B. 12 (11)]; ({on the eight or more proposed derivations see Vaniéek p. 386, who follows Curtius (after Doderlein) p. 513 sqq. in connecting it with a root meaning to supplicate, implore; hence the implored ; per contra cf. Max Miiller, Chips ete. iv. 227 sq.; L. and 8. s. v. fin.]); [fr. Hom. down]; Sept. for 58, ΟΝ and m7; a god, a goddess; 1. a general appellation of deities or divinities: Acts xxviii. 6; 1 Co. viii. 4; 2 Th. ii. 4; once ἡ θεός, Acts xix. 37 G LT Tr WH; θεοῦ φωνὴ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου, Acts xii. 22; ἄνθρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν θεόν, Jn. x. 33; plur., of the gods of the…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

θεός. For the application of the title θεός to the Ptolemaic kings it is sufficient to recall Brit. Mus. Inscrr. IV. 1 No. 906% (B.C. 284-273) where a votive offering is dedicated in honour of Πτολεμαίου τοῦ σωτῆρος καὶ θεοῦ, and the description of Ptolemy V. (Epiphanes) on the Rosetta stone—OG/S gol? (B.C. 196) ὑπάρχων θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ Kal θεᾶς : cf. Deissmann LAE, p. 348 and the full discussion by E. Kornemann ‘‘ Zur Geschichte der antiken Herrscherkulte” in Beztrdge zur alten Geschichte [Klio] i., p. 51 ff. (Leipzig, 1902). The same practice is still more strikingly illustrated in the Imperial period, as when in an inscr. from the Fayum district, dated March 17th, B.c. 24, Augustus is described as θεὸς ἐκ θεοῦ (OG/S 6557), or as when a votive inscr. is addressed to Nero—daya0a(t) θεῶ(ι) (Cos 927): see Deissmann 7s. p. 349. With this may be compared the frequent use for Augustus of the…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

θεός (theos) — God.

θεός, ὁ,

Boeotian dialect θιός, Laconian dialect σιός (see. below), [Refs 5th c.AD+], Cretan dialect θιός [Refs], Doric dialect also θεύς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; vocative (only late) θεός, also θεέ [LXX+NT]; but classical in compound names, Ἀμφίθεε, Τιμόθεε:—God, the Deity, in general sense, both singular and plural (εἰ καὶ ἐπὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἐπὶ θεὸν ἁρμόζει μεταφέρειν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σὺν θ. εἰρημένον [Refs 5th c.BC+]: so in plural, σύν γε θεοῖσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ pi.[Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will,[Refs 4th c.BC+]; θεῶν συνεθελόντων, βουλομένων, [Refs 5th c.BC+]bless you! good heavens! for heaven's sake! [Refs 8th c.BC+]: doubled in poets, θεὸν θεόν τις ἀγλαϊζέτω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; θεοί (Cretan dialect θιοί) as an opening formula in Inscrr. (i.e. τύχην ἀγαθὴν διδοῖεν), [Refs].1, etc.: in Prose also with the Article, ὁ θ.…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

θεός

theos

of uncertain affinity; a deity, especially (with 3588) the supreme

Divinity; figuratively, a magistrate; by Hebraism, very:--X exceeding,

God, god(-ly, -ward).

see GREEK for 3588

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

θεός, οῦ, ὁ

n.f. & n.m.

God, a god

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

θεός theos 1x

a deity, Acts 7:43; 1 Cor. 8:5; an idol, Acts 7:40; God, the true God, Mt. 3:9, et al. freq.; God, possessed of true godhead, Jn. 1:1; Rom. 9:5; from the Hebrew, applied to potentates, Jn. 10:34, 35; τῷ θεῷ, an intensive term, from the Hebrew, exceedingly, Acts 7:20, and, perhaps, 2 Cor. 10:4

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

θεός θεός, ὁ, God, Hom., both in general sense, Θεὸς δώσει God will grant, and in particular sense, θεός τις a god; πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Hom.:—things are said to happen σὺν θεῷ, σύν γε θεοῖσιν by the will of God, id. Hom., etc.; οὐκ ἄνευ θεοῦ, Lat. non sine diis, Od.; οὐκ ἄνευθε θεοῦ Il.; οὐ θεῶν ἄτερ Pind.;— ἐκ θεόφι Il.;— ὑπὲρ θεόν against his will, id. Il.;— κατὰ θεόν τινα, Lat. divinitus, Eur.:—as an oath, πρὸς θεῶν by the gods, in God's name, Trag.; θεὸς ἴστω Soph., etc.

θεός as fem. for θεά, θέαινα, a goddess, Hom.; θήλεια θεός Il.; ἡ νερτέρα θ. Proserpine, Soph.; often in oaths, νὴ τὼ θεώ id. Soph.; ναὶ τὼ σιώ, with the Spartans, of Castor and Pollux, Xen.; with the Boeotians, of Amphion and Zethus, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

god ('Elohim, 'El, [`Elyon], Shadday, Yahweh; Theos):

I. INTRODUCTION TO THE GENERAL IDEA

1. The Idea in Experience and in Thought

2. Definition of the Idea

3. The Knowledge of God

4. Ethnic Ideas of God

(1) Animism

(2) Fetishism

(3) Idolatry

(4) Polytheism

(5) Henotheism

(6) Pantheism

(7) Deism

(8) Semitic Monolatry

(9) Monotheism

II. THE IDEA OF GOD IN THE OLD TESTAMENT

1. The Course of Its Development

2. Forms of Its Manifestation

(1) The Face or Countenance of God

(2) The Voice and Word of God

(3) The Glory of God

(4) The Angel of God

(5) The Spirit of God

(6) The Name of God

(7) Occasional Forms

3. The Names of God

(1) Generic

(2) Attributive

(3) Yahweh

4. Pre-prophetic Conceptions of God

(1) Yahweh Alone Is the God of Israel

(a) His Early Worship

(b) Popular Religion

(c) Polytheistic Tendencies

(i) Coordination

(ii) Assimilation

(iii) Disintegration

(d) No Hebrew Goddesses

(e) Human Sacrifices

Easton's Bible Dictionary

God

(A.S. and Dutch God; Dan. Gud; Ger. Gott), the name of the Divine Being. It is the rendering (1) of the Hebrew ’El, from a word meaning to be strong; (2) of ’Eloah_, plural _’Elohim. The singular form, Eloah, is used only in poetry. The plural form is more commonly used in all parts of the Bible, The Hebrew word Jehovah (q.v.), the only other word generally employed to denote the Supreme Being, is uniformly rendered in the Authorized Version by “LORD,” printed in small capitals. The existence of God is taken for granted in the Bible. There is nowhere any argument to prove it. He who disbelieves this truth is spoken of as one devoid of understanding (Ps. 14:1).

The arguments generally adduced by theologians in proof of the being of God are:

(1.) The a priori argument, which is the testimony afforded by reason.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(good). Throughout the Hebrew Scriptures two chief names are used for the one true divine Being--ELOHIM, commonly translated God in our version, and JEHOVAH, translated Lord . Elohim is the plural of Eloah (in Arabic Allah); it is often used in the short form EL (a word signifying strength , as in EL-SHADDAI, God Almighty, the name by which God was specially known to the patriarchs. (Genesis 17:1; 28:3; Exodus 6:3) The etymology is uncertain, but it is generally agreed that the primary idea is that of strength, power of effect , and that it properly describes God in that character in which he is exhibited to all men in his works, as the creator, sustainer and supreme governor of the world. The plural form of Elohim has given rise to much discussion. The fanciful idea that it…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

This name, the derivation of which is uncertain, we give to that eternal, infinite, perfect, and incomprehensible Being, the Creator of all things, who preserves and governs all by his almighty power and wisdom, and is the only proper object of worship. The proper Hebrew name for God is JEHOVAH, which signifies He is. But the Jews, from a feeling of reverence, avoid pronouncing this name, substituting for it, wherever it occurs in the sacred test, the word ADONAI, Lord; except in the expression, ADONAI JEHOVAH, Lord Jehovah, for which they put, ADONAI ELOHIM, Lord God. This usage, which is not without an element of superstition, is very ancient, dating its origin some centuries before Christ; but there is no good ground for assuming its existence in the days of the inspired Old Testament writers. The proper word for God is ELOHIM, which is plural in its form, being thus used to signify…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
96%god
god96% · 1289×other renderings3% · 34×other renderings1% · 19×

1,342 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 14 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject31%adverbial26%object24%predicate12%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,311 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
βασιλείαkingship, sovereλόγοςa word, speech, υἱόςa son, descenden
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπαράδικαιοσύνηjustice, justnes
ἀπό
εἰρήνηpeace, peace of ὅτιthat, since, becἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἈβραάμPropἸσαάκPropΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegυἱόςa son, descendenοὗτος
θεόςof God1311×
what comes after →
Article the
δίδωμιI offer, giveπαντοκράτωρruler of the uniπατήρfather, Father,
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theπατήρfather, Father, αὐτός
ἐγώ
καίand, even, also,Article theἐκβάλλωI throw, cast, p
ἐν
Article theαὐτόςΧριστόςanointed, the Me
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,εἰς

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceθεός · 1,311× in the New Testament
Acts Romans Luke 1 Corinthians Revelation John 2 Corinthians Hebrews 1 John Matthew Mark 1 Peter

15 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,637 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 7c. AD 40

Τινὲς γὰρ τὸν κόσμον μᾶλλον ἢ τὸν κοσμοποιὸν θαυμάσαντες τὸν μὲν ἀγένητόν τε καὶ ἀίδιον ἀπεφήναντο, τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ πολλὴν ἀπραξίαν ἀνάγνως κατεψεύσαντο, δέον ἔμπαλιν τοῦ μὲν τὰς δυνάμεις ὡς ποιητοῦ καὶ πατρὸς καταπλαγῆναι, τὸν δὲ μὴ πλέον ἀποσεμνῦναι…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὡς πύργος, ὃν οἱ παῖδες αὐτοῦ ἐφ' ὕβρει τοῦ θεοῦ ᾠκοδόμησαν, καὶ ὡς τὰς φωνὰς αὐτῶν μετέβαλε καὶ ὁ τόπος, ἐν ᾧ τοῦτο γέγονε, Βαβυλὼν ἐκλήθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

1 βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ καὶ Ἀλεξάνδρου θεοῦ Φιλομήτορος καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεᾶς Φιλαδέλφου ἔτους ἑκκαιδεκάτου ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ

Chrest.Wilck. 12Pathyris89 BC

ἡμῖν Φιλόξενος ὁ ἀδελφὸς διʼ ὧν κεκόμικεν ἡμῖν Ὄρσης γραμμάτων περὶ τοῦ τὸν μέγιστον Θεὸν Σωτῆρα βασιλέα ἐπιβεβληκέναι εἰς Μέμφιν, Ἱέρακα δὲ προκεχειρίσθαι μετὰ δυνάμεων μυρίων ἐπὶ καταστολὴν τῆς

looking to the <the> of [our] faith founder and perfecter Jesus, who in view of what is lying before Him joy endured [the] cross [its] shame having despised, at right hand and of the throne <the> of God has sat down.
κεκάθικεν.¶kathizō has sat down. G2523 Verb · perfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
46× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Hebrews than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for to seat or to set, used in Matthew 5:1 and many other places to describe Jesus sitting down to teach. It can also mean to appoint or to settle, and is often used to describe people sitting or being seated in a place of authority. This word is commonly used in the New Testament to describe various scenes and settings.
Tyndale gloss
to seat
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word καθίζω (kathizō) means to make someone sit down or to sit oneself. It can refer to both the act of seating (transitive) and the state of being seated (intransitive). In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as appointing judges (1 Corinthians 6:4) and sitting down to teach (Matthew 5:1). The lexicons do not present significant disagreements on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καθ-ίζω,

[in LXX chiefly for ישׁב;]

causal, to make to sit down, set, appoint: Ac 2:30, I Co 6:4, Eph 1:20.

Intrans., to sit down, be seated, sit: Mt 5:1, Mk 9:35, Lk 7:15, Jo 8:2, al.; c. inf. tel., I Co 10:7; seq. εἰς, II Th 2:4; ἐπί, c. acc., Mk 11:2, Jo 12:14; id. c. gen., Jo 19:13, Ac 12:21; ὧδε,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καθ-ίζω ; fut. καθίσω ΓΒ. 37 (32)]; 1 aor. ἐκάθισα (impy. 2 sing. κάθισον once, Mk. xii. 36 Tr txt. WH mrg.); pf. κεκάθικα (Mk. xi. 2 [not WH Trmrg.; Heb. xii. 2 LT Tr WH; a late form, see Veitch 5. v.]); 1 aor. mid. subjune. 2 pers. plur. καθίσησθε (Lk. xxii. 30 Ree.) ; fut. mid. καθίσομαι; fr. Hom. down; [cf. B. 60 (52) ]; 1. trans. to make to sit down (xara; q. v- III. 1), to set, ap point; Sept. for DWI: τινὰ ἐπὶ θρόνου [L T Tr WH ros

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καθίζω. A good ex. of the trans. use of this verb, as in 1 Cor 64, Eph 1°, Ey. Petr. 3, is afforded by P Oxy XII. 1469’ (A.D. 298) ὃ τῇ ἐπίξει (/. ἐπείξει) τῶν χωμάτων ἐπικείμενος καθείζων ἡμᾶς τοὺ[ς οἸϊκίζοντας τοῖς τόπο[ι]ς ἠνάγκασεν ἀ[ν]αβαλεῖν ναύβια σν, ,‘‘the overseer of labour on dykes set us, the local inhabitants, to work, and made us bank up 250 naubia’’ (Edd.). For the intrans. usage, as probably in Jn 1918 (see P. Corssen ZV7W, 1914, p. 338ff-), with reference to ‘‘judicial”’ sitting, see Sy// 929%8 (ii/B.c.) cited s.v. διακούω, and cf. PSI V. 502%! (B.c. 257-6) καθίσαντες εἰς Td ἱερόν, P Meyer 198 (ii/A.D.) TH ta ἐκάθισα eis πλ[ο]ῖόν [pov, Preisigke 4117° (A.D. 117) τὸ προσκύνημα…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καθίζω (kathizō) — to seat.

καθίζω,

Ionic dialect κατ-, imperfect κάθιζον [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future καθέσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; καθίσω (intransitive) [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; Ionic dialect κατίσω (transitive) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect also καθιῶ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Doric dialect καθιξῶ [Refs 2nd c.BC+]: aorist 1 καθεῖσα [Refs 8th c.BC+]subjunctive καθέσω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive καθέσαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; poetry κάθεσσα [Refs 5th c.BC+] codices; this aorist καθεῖσα has Ms. authority in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also Epic dialect participle καθίσσας [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect καθίξας [Refs 3rd c.BC+]subjunctive καθίξῃ[Refs]; late participle καθιζήσας, subjunctive -ζήσῃ, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: perfect κεκάθῐκα [NT+1st c.BC+]:—middle, imperfect ἐκαθιζόμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]: future καθιζήσομαι [NT+5th c.BC+] -ιοῦμαι [LXX]: aorist 1 καθεσσάμην [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐκαθισσάμην…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καθίζω

kathizo

another (active) form for 2516; to seat down, i.e. set (figuratively,

appoint); intransitively, to sit (down); figuratively, to settle

(hover, dwell):--continue, set, sit (down), tarry.

see GREEK for 2516

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καθίζω

v.

I set, make to sit

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καθίζω kathizō 46x

(1) trans. to cause to sit, place; καθίζομαι, to be seated, sit, Mt. 19:28; Lk. 22:30; to cause to sit as judges, place, appoint, 1 Cor. 6:4; (2) intrans. to sit, sit down, Mt. 13:48; 26:36; to remain, settle, stay, continue, live, Lk. 24:49

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καθίζω ionic κατ- imperf. καθῖζον or κάθιζον attic ἐκάθιζον fut. attic καθιῶ doric καθιξῶ aor1 ἐκάθι^σα epic κάθι^σα attic aor1 καθῖσα ionic κατῖσα epic part. καθίσσας doric καθίξας aor1 καθεῖσα aor1 -θεσσα Mid., imperf. ἐκαθιζόμην fut. καθιζήσομαι later καθίσομαι aor1 ἐκαθισάμην Causal, to make to sit down, seat, Il., Hdt.; καθίσαι τινὰ εἰς θρόνον Xen.

to set or place, Hom.; καθίσαι στρατόν to encamp it, Eur., Thuc.

to set or place for any purpose, post, Od.; καθίσαι φυλάκους, φύλακας to set guards, Hdt., Xen.

to set up, ἀνδριάντα κάθεσσαν Pind.

to make an assembly take their seats, Od.; κ. τὸ δικαστήριον to hold the court, Ar.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-RAI-3S — Verb · perfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
perfect active indicative — a past action whose result still stands.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-RAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: peRfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
17%having sat down
having sat down17% · 8×sat down13% · 6×sit9% · 4×having sat9% · 4×sat7% · 3×do sit4% · 2×he sat4% · 2×set2% · 1×other renderings35% · 16×

46 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 24 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb85%adverbial15%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςὄροςa mountainαἰγιαλόςsea-coast, beach
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theσύ
αὐτός
μαθητήςa learner, disciὀσφῦςthe loinsδίδωμιI offer, give
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
οὔπωNegπώποτεat any time, eve
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
καθίζωhas sat down.46×
what comes after →
ἐπί
Article theαὐτόςθρόνοςa throne, seat
ἐν
δεξιόςon the right hanArticle the
Article the
υἱόςa son, descendenγραμματεύςa scribe, town-cλαόςa people, the cr
ἐκ
δεξιόςon the right han
καίand, even, also, nam
πᾶςall, the whole, λύωI loose, untie,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαθίζω · 46× in the New Testament
Acts Matthew Mark Luke Hebrews John Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Thessalonians Ephesians
Across the New Testament10 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 87 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.12c. AD 40

2, 15), τῇ κρίσει τῶν φύσεως πραγμάτων, „καὶ ἐκάθισεν ἐπὶ τοῦ φρέατος", ἐκδεχόμενος τί ὁ θεὸς ἀνομβρήσει πότιμον τῇ διψώσῃ καὶ ποθούσῃ ψυχῇ τὸ ἀγαθόν.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 5.244c. AD 75–95

ὅ τε οὖν Ἀβιμέλεχος ἐκάθισεν ἐνεδρεύων καὶ ὁ Γυάλης ἀφυλακτοτέρως διέτριβεν ἐπὶ τοῦ προαστείου καὶ Ζάβουλος σὺν αὐτῷ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.10c. AD 100

λαμβάνει δὲ τῶν αὐτῶν τριῶν δογμάτων γνῶσιν Δαυείδ καὶ λέγει: Μακάριος ἀνήρ, ὃς οὐκ ἐπορεύθη ἐν βουλῇ ἀσεβῶν, καθὼς καὶ οἱ ἰχθύες πορεύονται ἐν σκότει εἰς τὰ βάθη: καὶ ἐν ὁδῷ ἁμαρτωλῶν οὐκ ἔστη, καθὼς οἱ δοκοῦντες φοβεῖσθαι τὸν κύριον ἁμαρτάνουσιν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
O.Claud. 1 134Mons ClaudianusAD 107

ἐδαπάνησεν. εἰ δὲ ἐμοὶ οὐ πιστεύεις, ὅτι τοῦτο μόνον δαπανᾷ, πέμψον τινὰ τῶν σῶν καθίσαι μίαν ἡμέραν ἵνα πειράσῃς. ἔρρωσο.

O.Did. 383DidymoiAD 110–AD 115

πάλλιον, κεφαλωτῶν καὶ δέσμην κράμβης καὶ καβάτιον ταριχίων. ἠρώτηκα Ποτάμωνα … … … ε καθίσῃ … … ποει

P.Meyer 19Oxyrhynchites (?)AD 101–AD 200

μητρὶ χαίρειν. ἐξελθὼν ἀπὸ σοῦ τῇ δεκάτῃ πεζὸς ὕπνωσα εἰς Χῦσιν καὶ τῇ ια ἐκάθισα εἰς πλοῖόν μου καὶ τῇ ιβ ἐγενόμην ἐν

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate